USRE44925E1 - Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement - Google Patents

Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement Download PDF

Info

Publication number
USRE44925E1
USRE44925E1 US13/084,087 US201113084087A USRE44925E US RE44925 E1 USRE44925 E1 US RE44925E1 US 201113084087 A US201113084087 A US 201113084087A US RE44925 E USRE44925 E US RE44925E
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
image
images
user
camera
computing device
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related, expires
Application number
US13/084,087
Inventor
Robert S. Vincent
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Transcenic Inc
Original Assignee
Transcenic Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=23513320&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=USRE44925(E1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Transcenic Inc filed Critical Transcenic Inc
Priority to US13/084,087 priority Critical patent/USRE44925E1/en
Assigned to TRANSCENIC, INC. reassignment TRANSCENIC, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: VINCENT, ROBERT STANFORD
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of USRE44925E1 publication Critical patent/USRE44925E1/en
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C11/00Photogrammetry or videogrammetry, e.g. stereogrammetry; Photographic surveying
    • G01C11/02Picture taking arrangements specially adapted for photogrammetry or photographic surveying, e.g. controlling overlapping of pictures
    • H04N5/23293
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F16/00Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor
    • G06F16/50Information retrieval; Database structures therefor; File system structures therefor of still image data
    • G06F16/58Retrieval characterised by using metadata, e.g. metadata not derived from the content or metadata generated manually
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/414Specialised client platforms, e.g. receiver in car or embedded in a mobile appliance
    • H04N21/4143Specialised client platforms, e.g. receiver in car or embedded in a mobile appliance embedded in a Personal Computer [PC]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/432Content retrieval operation from a local storage medium, e.g. hard-disk
    • H04N21/4325Content retrieval operation from a local storage medium, e.g. hard-disk by playing back content from the storage medium
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/80Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
    • H04N21/83Generation or processing of protective or descriptive data associated with content; Content structuring
    • H04N21/84Generation or processing of descriptive data, e.g. content descriptors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/50Constructional details
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/61Control of cameras or camera modules based on recognised objects
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/63Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/222Studio circuitry; Studio devices; Studio equipment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/222Studio circuitry; Studio devices; Studio equipment
    • H04N5/262Studio circuits, e.g. for mixing, switching-over, change of character of image, other special effects ; Cameras specially adapted for the electronic generation of special effects
    • H04N5/2625Studio circuits, e.g. for mixing, switching-over, change of character of image, other special effects ; Cameras specially adapted for the electronic generation of special effects for obtaining an image which is composed of images from a temporal image sequence, e.g. for a stroboscopic effect
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/765Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/765Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus
    • H04N5/77Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus between a recording apparatus and a television camera
    • H04N5/772Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus between a recording apparatus and a television camera the recording apparatus and the television camera being placed in the same enclosure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/91Television signal processing therefor
    • H04N5/92Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
    • H04N5/9201Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the video signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/79Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
    • H04N9/80Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
    • H04N9/804Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components
    • H04N9/8042Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback involving pulse code modulation of the colour picture signal components involving data reduction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/79Processing of colour television signals in connection with recording
    • H04N9/80Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback
    • H04N9/82Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only
    • H04N9/8205Transformation of the television signal for recording, e.g. modulation, frequency changing; Inverse transformation for playback the individual colour picture signal components being recorded simultaneously only involving the multiplexing of an additional signal and the colour video signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3252Image capture parameters, e.g. resolution, illumination conditions, orientation of the image capture device
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3225Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title of data relating to an image, a page or a document
    • H04N2201/3253Position information, e.g. geographical position at time of capture, GPS data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N2201/00Indexing scheme relating to scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, and to details thereof
    • H04N2201/32Circuits or arrangements for control or supervision between transmitter and receiver or between image input and image output device, e.g. between a still-image camera and its memory or between a still-image camera and a printer device
    • H04N2201/3201Display, printing, storage or transmission of additional information, e.g. ID code, date and time or title
    • H04N2201/3274Storage or retrieval of prestored additional information
    • H04N5/232

Definitions

  • This invention relates to referencing, sorting, and displaying images in a three-dimensional system. More particularly, it relates to a system having an image capturing device that captures images of objects together with spatial reference information defining the absolute position of the image capturing device and the relative position of the object relative to that device. It also relates to image retrieval and display, where the spatial reference information associated with each image facilitates browsing through the images in an organized manner.
  • Devices which combine images by matching features common to each of two or more images, i.e. superimposing.
  • One aspect of the present invention is recording positional data along with images.
  • a number of methods are known whereby one may locate an object and describe the position of an object relative to a positional reference.
  • a magnetic device is known which can determine its position and orientation within a known magnetic field. Satellite systems and radio signal triangulation can also be used to determine position precisely.
  • Inertial position determination systems are also known and are widely used in inertial navigational systems.
  • An object of this invention is providing an image data gathering device which encodes positional and/or spatial information by capturing both camera position and camera orientation information along with image data. This information permits images to be joined or sequenced for viewing without the distortions that can result from attempting to match the edges of adjoining images together.
  • a further object of this invention is providing three-dimensional image reconstruction of objects using frames shot from different viewpoints and perspectives through the provision of a triangulation reference.
  • Still another object of this invention is providing a camera path map which allows images to be selected based upon the position and orientation of the camera from the map. For example, an operator cam learn the location of an object in a film clip, such as an escalator. Images of the escalator may then be quickly and automatically located by selecting other frames which point to that same escalator from different camera positions.
  • Another object of the invention is providing a compact and practical image and positional data recording system which uses commonly available equipment.
  • the invention resides in a video camera that is integrated with a tracking data acquisition unit containing accelerometers and gimbal-mounted gyroscopes, and optionally a rangefinder.
  • a microprocessor and logic associated with the accelerometers and gyroscopes senses all rotational motions of the camera by means of sensors associated with the gimbals and senses all translational motions of the camera by means of sensors associated with the accelerometers.
  • the rangefinder provides information to the microprocessor and logic concerning the distance from the camera to the subject being photographed.
  • the microprocessor and logic compute and generate a modulated audio signal that is encoded with a continuous record of acceleration in the X, Y and Z directions as well as with a continuous record of the pitch, roll, and yaw of the camera and of the distance to the subject.
  • This audio tracking information data signal is recorded on the audio track of the same video tape upon which the video images are being recorded by the camera. In this manner, the video tape recording captures, along with the sequence of images, the tracking data from which the precise position of the camera, its precise orientation, and the position of the subject may later be computed.
  • the recorded audio tracking information data and video data is played back into a computer.
  • Images are selected from the sequence of images and are retained, in compressed form, in a database.
  • Each image is then linked to computed positional information that defines, for each image, the location and orientation of the camera and, optionally, the distance to the subject and the subject location. This positional information is derived through computation from the tracking information retrieved from the video tape audio track, as will be explained below.
  • special computer programs can aid an individual using the computer in navigating through the images, using the positional information to organize the images in ways that make it easy for the user to browse through the images presented on the graphics screen.
  • Several such programs are described below, and a complete description is presented of a movie mapper program which presents the user with a plan view and elevational views of the camera path plotted as a graph alongside views of selected images, with the path marked to show the position and orientation of the camera. The user, by clicking at any point on this path with a computer mouse, may instantly retrieve and view an image captured at the chosen point.
  • the user may command the program to search for and find the nearest image which gives a view rotated slightly to the left or right or which maintains the same view but advances forward in the direction of the view or backward.
  • One may also jump forward and turn simultaneously.
  • a wider field of view may be assembled by assembling automatically chosen images and aligning them into a panorama. The user is thus enabled to navigate through the images in the manner of navigating a boat to the extent permitted by the nature and variety of the images in the data base.
  • FIG. 1 is a rendering of the spatially referenced video camera 100 , which includes a tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 , a video camera 120 having a video cassette recorder 130 , a demodulation circuit 155 , and a personal computer 185 .
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective drawing of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 .
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the tracking sensors and the microprocessor based tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 according to the invention in the context of the spatially referenced video camera 100 .
  • FIG. 4 is a data format diagram showing the tracking data acquisition unit output packet format.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the program system modules that represent the major software components of the spatially referenced camera system.
  • FIG. 6 is a data flow diagram depicting the data flow through the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 .
  • FIG. 7 is a data flow diagram depicting the tracking and video data flow from playback of the video cassette recorder 130 , through the demodulation circuit 155 , into the personal computer 185 under the control of the data entry and storage program 305 .
  • FIG. 8 is a data format diagram depicting alternative positional data record formats including the quaternion position notation record format 715 and the direct angular notation format 775 .
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram of the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310 .
  • FIG. 10 is a more detailed block diagram of the step 10006 in FIG. 9 .
  • FIG. 11 is a more detailed block diagram of the step 1120 in FIG. 10 .
  • FIG. 12 is a more detailed block diagram of the calculate current position step 1214 in FIG. 11 .
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an alternative method for converting tracking data to position data.
  • FIG. 14 is a more detailed block diagram of the write position record step 1122 in FIG. 10 .
  • FIG. 15 is a block diagram of the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 illustrating in particular its electrical interconnections to the remaining elements of the spatially referenced video camera 100 .
  • FIG. 16 is a block diagram of the programs which control the central processing unit 480 in FIG. 15 .
  • FIG. 17 is an alternate embodiment of the invention illustrating use of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 as a pointing and image retrieval device.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates the operation of the positional frame retrieval program 330 in which range information is added so that all of the images viewing a selected object 3202 may be located and retrieved, as a group.
  • FIGS. 19 to 25 and 28 to 31 are computer screen snapshot views of the screens generated by the movie mapper program 325 in operation, including presentations of the captured images, of the path of the camera in plan and elevational views, and of various pop-down menus;
  • FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating the structure of program-generated objects in the movie mapper program 325 when it is in actual operation.
  • FIG. 27 is an information flow block diagram of the program-generated objects in the movie mapper program 325 illustrating how they communicate.
  • FIGS. 32 to 35 are flow chart representations of portions of the movie mapper program 325 .
  • a spatially referenced video camera is shown embodying the present invention and generally identified by the numeral 100 .
  • the spatially referenced video camera 100 includes a tracking data acquisition unit 105 rigidly attached to a video camera 120 having a built-in video cassette recorder 130 .
  • video data from the video camera 120 and tracking data from the tracking data acquisition unit 105 are recorded onto a video cassette within the recorder 130 .
  • the information is transferred to a personal computer 185 for processing and display.
  • FIG. 3 presents a block diagram of the camera 100 , illustrating its individual hardware components and bow they are interconnected by signal paths.
  • the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 contains a data acquisition program 300 ( FIG. 16 ), and the personal computer 185 contains a number of computer programs. All of these programs, and their data flow relationships, are shown in FIG. 5 which illustrates the camera 100 's software components in overview.
  • the video data gathered by the video camera 120 and the position and orientation data gathered by the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 are first stored on videotape. Later, they are fed into the personal computer 185 .
  • the two data streams are captured by the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 and are stored, respectively, in a tracking database 324 and in a video database 323 .
  • the tracking database 324 is reprocessed into a positional database 322 by a tracking database to positional database conversion program 310 .
  • the image retrieval programs 325 , 330 , and 335 may be called upon to search through the positional database 322 , to retrieve images from the video database 323 based upon camera location, camera orientation, and even object location, and to display the images upon the face of the computer 185 .
  • the video camera 120 ( FIG. 1 ) produces a standard video signal that is recorded on the video track of a video cassette by the camera's video cassette recorder 130 .
  • the tracking data acquisition unit 105 contains three orthogonally positioned translational accelerometers 435 , 440 , and 445 ; two orthogonally arranged gyroscopes 400 and 410 ; and a laser rangefinder 485 . All six of these sensors are rigidly mounted to an inertial platform 415 .
  • a control circuit 470 polls the output signals of these sensors and assembles tracking data frames 535 ( FIG.
  • a serial bit stream comprised of these tracking data frames is modulated to produce an audio line level modulated tracking data signal 115 which is fed into the audio input 125 of the video cassette recorder 130 and recorded on the audio track of the video cassette alongside the corresponding video information.
  • the completed recording, stored on the video cassette, is played back to the personal computer 185 on any standard video cassette player or directly from the camera 120 ( FIG. 1 ).
  • the tracking data is demodulated by a demodulator circuit 155 and is input to the personal computer 185 through a standard serial I/O serial port 175 .
  • the video data is input to the personal computer 185 via a video digitizer input 180 .
  • a data entry and storage program 305 stores the tracking and video data on the personal computer's disk operating system 320 in a tracking database 324 and in a video database 323 .
  • a second program 310 converts the tracking database 324 into a positional database 322 .
  • the set of three display programs 325 , 330 , and 335 allow a user to view and select video frames based on the relative position or absolute orientation of the camera.
  • the tracking data acquisition unit 105 continuously measures the translational acceleration and rotational orientation experienced by the spatially referenced video camera 100 .
  • three accelerometers 435 , 440 and 445 such as SUNDSTRAND Model QA-700, are positioned orthogonal to each other and are mounted on a stable inertial platform 415 .
  • the accelerometers measure acceleration in each of three dimensions: accelerometer 435 measures acceleration in the X direction, accelerometer 445 measures acceleration in the Y direction, accelerometer 440 measures acceleration in the Z direction.
  • Each accelerometer outputs a voltage signal with an amplitude proportional to the acceleration detected.
  • a multichannel analog to digital converter 465 such as ANALOG DEVICES Model AD7716, receives each accelerometer's output and generates a 24-bit numerical representation of the acceleration experienced in each direction.
  • Two gyroscopes such as GYRATION Model GE9100A, a vertical gyroscope 400 and a directional gyroscope 410 are also orthogonally mounted on the stable inertial platform 415 relative to each other.
  • the vertical gyroscope 400 aligned along the X or Y axis, measures yaw (rotation about the Z axis)
  • the directional gyroscope 410 aligned along the Z axis, measures both roll (rotation about the Y axis) and pitch (rotation about the X axis).
  • the gyroscopes are dual gimballed electronic components that generate a pair of square wave signals which are locked out of phase with respect to each other.
  • the sequence of the rising and falling edges of the square waves relative to each other indicates the angular rotation about the gyroscope's measurement axis experienced by the spatially referenced camera 100 .
  • Quadrature decoders 450 , 455 , 460 receive the three paired square wave signal outputs of the gyroscopes 400 , 410 ; and for each signal pair, they count the relative sequence of rising and falling edges between the two square wave signals to generate a 16-bit numerical representation of the rotation experienced about each axis. An interrupt is generated following any change in these signals. This interrupt causes a central processing unit 480 ( FIG. 15 ) within the tracking data acquisition unit 105 to capture the new status of the counts within the decoders 450 , 455 , and 460 .
  • the inertial platform 415 ( FIG. 2 ) is connected to a post 425 that is threaded at one end 430 such that the entire data acquisition unit 105 can be rigidly attached to the tripod mounting hardware of a standard camcorder 120 .
  • control circuit 470 ( FIGS. 2 , 3 , and 15 ) mounted to the bottom of the inertial platform 415 (see FIG. 2 ).
  • This microcontroller based circuit (Z-WORLD SMARTBLOCK Model SB-DEV-32) polls the quadrature decoders 450 , 455 , 460 and the analog to digital converter 465 in sequence.
  • the respective data packets 500 , 505 , and 520 from each sensor and a frame identification pattern ( 530 or 550 ) are compiled to form the tracking data frame 535 (or 540 ) as the first step 600 ( FIG.
  • the data frame resulting from the first step 600 is broken into 4-bit nibbles which are encased within message byte having a “1” start bit and three “0” stop bits, as in “1XXXX000” where “XXXX” is the 4 bits of data.
  • the message bytes are then subjected to encoding (HARRIS Model HD-6409).
  • the control circuit transmits a continuous stream of the tracking data frames to a modulator circuit 475 ( FIGS. 3 and 15 ) that modulates the data on to an audio line level signal.
  • the inertial platform 415 , the circuitry 420 , the gyroscopes 400 , 410 and the accelerometers 435 , 440 , 445 are all contained within a case 107 ( FIG. 1 ).
  • the single output 110 from the case 107 produces an audio signal 115 containing the encoded bit stream of acceleration and orientation data.
  • the output of the tracking data acquisition control circuit 470 is thus recorded to video tape alongside the corresponding video data signal from the video camera 120 .
  • the spatially referenced camera 100 can be configured and used with a laser rangefinder 485 ( FIG. 2 ), such as an Acuity Research Inc. ACCURANGE Model 3000 in addition to the video camera 120 .
  • a laser rangefinder 485 FIG. 2
  • the instantaneous distance between the spatially referenced camera 100 and a pinpointed location on the surface of an object that is being recorded is also captured and stored as a binary numerical representation of distance along with tracking data from the other sensors.
  • range data derived from the rangefinder 485 is appended to the data frame and recorded to video tape alongside the corresponding video data signal from the video camera 120 . (If the camera 120 is of an “autofocus” design, it may be possible to derive a range signal from the camera's autofocus mechanism.)
  • the rangefinder 485 ( FIG. 2 ) is rigidly mounted to the inertial platform 415 and generates a continuous serial data output signal containing two alternating values.
  • the rangefinder 485 output signal RXA 1 is directly input to the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 as a serial data signal.
  • the first value contained in the signal output by the rangefinder 485 is a 24 bit numerical representation of the distance between the precise spot on the surface of the object being recorded and the spatially referenced camera 100 .
  • the second value is an 8 bit gray scale value that indicates the reflectivity of the object's surface at the measured location.
  • control circuit 470 is configured to be interrupted by a signal from the quadrature decoders 450 , 455 , & 460 whenever there is a change in the inertial platform's orientation detected by the gyroscopes 400 and 410 .
  • the control circuit Upon detecting an interrupt signal, the control circuit reads the range and reflectivity values presented serially by the rangefinder 485 .
  • a range data packet 520 ( FIG. 4 ) is compiled along with the accelerometer data packets 500 and the gyroscope data packets 505 to form the tracking data frame with range data as indicated at 540 in FIG. 4 .
  • the tracking data frame format 535 output by the tracking data acquisition unit 105 is essentially comprised of two or three different kinds of packets: acceleration packets 500 , gyroscopic packets 505 and optionally, range packets 510 .
  • An acceleration packet 500 is a 24 bit value that represents the magnitude of an acceleration vector in the X, Y or Z direction.
  • a gyroscopic packet 505 is a 16 bit value that represents degree of pitch, roil or yaw.
  • a range packet 520 is a 24 bit value plus an eight bit value.
  • the 24 bit value 510 represents a range distance and the eight bit number 515 represents relative surface reflectivity in terms of a gray scale value.
  • the format of a complete data frame 535 is composed of a frame identification pattern 530 , which is formed from three repetitions of the 16 bit value 017F hex (at 525 ). This is followed by data: a 24-bit acceleration value in the X direction 500 A, a 16-bit pitch value 505 A, a 24-bit acceleration value in the v direction 500 B, a 16-bit roll value 505 B, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Z direction 500 C, and a 16-bit yaw value 505 C.
  • the tracking data frame format with range information included 540 starts with a frame identification pattern 550 composed of three repetitions of the value 037F hex (at 545 ), followed by a 24-bit acceleration value in the X direction 500 A, an 8-bit delta (or incremental change) pitch value 505 A, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Y direction 500 B, an 8-bit delta roll value 505 B, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Z direction 500 C, an 8-bit delta yaw value 505 C, and finally the range data 555 and a gray scale reflectivity value 560 .
  • the records 540 containing range information are generated whenever an interrupt from the decoders 450 , 455 , and 460 indicates that the camera orientation has changed.
  • the video tape is filled with modulated tracking and video data, it is played back.
  • the video output is directly connected to a conventional video digitizer input 180 , such as the INTEL SMART VIDEO RECORDER, that is inserted into the ISA, EISA, VESA, PCI, or other accessory port or slot of the personal computer 185 .
  • the video digitizer input 180 captures the video frames of the recorded images and passes digitized video frame data on to the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the audio output of the video cassette recorder 135 is fed into a demodulator circuit 155 which converts the modulated tracking data signal back into a serial bit-stream of tracking data.
  • the demodulation output 165 is connected to a conventional serial data input port 175 of the personal computer 185 .
  • the demodulation circuit 155 converts the modulated tracking data signal into an RS-232 serial data signal which is read into the personal computer 185 by the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 through the serial port 175 .
  • FIG. 7 shows the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 data flow diagram.
  • the modulated tracking data signal 145 from the audio output 135 of the video cassette recorder 130 or is fed into the demodulator 155 , where the audio signal is demodulated into a serial bit stream (step 640 ).
  • the output of this process flows into a manchester decoder (step 645 ). Every other nibble following an initial leading one of the decoded bit stream is then serially transmitted by the demodulator circuit 155 to the personal computer's serial port 175 (step 650 ).
  • the personal computer receives the bit stream and encodes each nibble as a ASCII hex digit 655 .
  • the ASCII digits are then assembled into lines of tracking data 660 .
  • the video signal 150 from the video output 140 of the video cassette recorder 130 is captured (step 680 ), and video frames are selected (step 685 ). Frame numbers are assigned to the selected video frames (step 690 ), and at step 665 these frame numbers are concatenated to the lines of tracking data to form tracking data lines. Finally, at step 675 a database of numbered tracking data lines is created and is stored on the disk in a database file called the tracking database 324 .
  • the video frame is fed into a video compression program, and the outputted compressed video frame is concatenated or otherwise linked to the same video frame number at 695 .
  • a database of numbered and compressed video frames is created and is stored on the disk in a file that is called the video database 323 .
  • the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 residing on the personal computer 185 , essentially builds two related databases.
  • the first is a tracking database 324 composed of enumerated records containing the orientation, the translational acceleration, and optionally the range data originally generated by the tracking data acquisition unit 105 .
  • the second is a video database 323 composed of enumerated records containing digitized and compressed images of video frames captured from the video tape originally generated by the video camera 120 .
  • the personal computer 185 converts the tracking database 324 into a positional database 322 via a software module called the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310 ( FIGS. 5 and 9 ).
  • an existing image capture computer program is adapted for use to capture, compress, and store selected images in the video database 323 , as indicated in steps 680 , 685 , 690 , 695 , and 700 of FIG. 7 .
  • This is a conventional program for video capture that can capture and store a video image every 1/10th or 1/20th of a second or so (whatever the human user of the system specifies).
  • This program is also capable of linking to and calling as a subroutine a separate program which performs the steps 655 , 660 , 665 , 670 , and 675 in FIG.
  • index value is stored in the tracking database 324 along with the associated tracking data extracted from the signal 170 .
  • the computer 185 is equipped with a conventional, serial port interrupt driven program that is called upon automatically, whenever the serial input port 176 receives a serial byte of the tracking data signal 170 , to retrieve the byte from the serial port UART and to store the byte in some form of circular buffer in RAM from which the bytes may be readily retrieved.
  • step 660 Each time the step 660 is performed (every 1/10th or 1/20th of a second or so), all the bytes currently in this circular buffer are retrieved, combined with historical data, and separated from any partial data frame that is retained as historical data. In this manner, several data frames in the format illustrated at 535 or 540 in FIG. 4 are retrieved from the circular buffer, combined with the current image retrieval index supplied by the image capture computer program, and stored in the tracking database 324 ( FIG. 5 ). Note that even though not all of the video image frames are normally retained, every piece of tracking data information must be retained so that the position and orientation of the inertial platform can be computed by a “dead reckoning” process. Accordingly, the same video image number is typically combined with several sets of tracking data information.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates the creation of the positional database.
  • Numbered tracking data frames from the tracking database 324 are input to the program 310 which, using well known principles of Newtonian mechanics, converts the tracking data lines into positional data records.
  • the positional data records are stored to the disk in a database file called the positional database 322 .
  • the format of the positional data records is dependent upon the method of conversion used in the conversion program 310 . As shown in FIG. 8 , there are two possible formats for the equivalent positional data.
  • the quaternion position notation record format is composed of position number 720 , video frame number 730 , X displacement from the origin 735 , Y displacement from the origin 740 , Z displacement from the origin 745 , and a unit vector defined by an X component 755 , a Y component 760 , a Z component 770 and a twist component 750 .
  • This data completely defines the position and orientation of the spatially referenced video camera 100 with respect to the point of origin.
  • the other equivalent format is the direct angular notation representation.
  • the details of the tracking database to positional database conversion programs 310 are shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the program 310 begins at 1002 by initializing the variables. Then at 1004 , it opens the input tracking data file 324 ( FIG. 5 ), the output position file 322 ( FIG. 5 ), and an alterative output position file (not shown—this alternative file has the orientation represented in quaternion form, rather than as yaw, pitch, and roll values). At 1006 , the data is retrieved, processed, and placed in the output file.
  • the data processing steps 1006 are described in FIG. 10 .
  • the program steps 1006 control the reading of the input file and enforce the formatting of the output file. In particular, these steps buffer the position records in such a manner that each record processed is complete even though the input records may have been broken up, as described above. In this manner, the program generates one and only one output position record for each frame.
  • the program begins at 1110 by reading in a data frame. At 1114 , if there are no more frames, then at 1130 the files are closed and we are done. If a frame is found, a data record is retrieved from the frame at 1112 . At 1118 , if a record is found, it is processed at 1120 and written out to the positional database 322 at step 1122 . Whether or not a record is found, program control continues at step 1124 where any unprocessed residual data is prepared (or added to) the next frame. Program control then returns to 1110 where the next frame is read.
  • the data record processing routine 1120 is described in FIG. 11 .
  • a record is read and is corrected for gyro counter overflow. Since the pitch, roll, and yaw numbers are 16 -bit numbers that increase continuously if the camera rotates, they will occasionally overflow to zero. These numbers are thus converted into a 32 bit numeric format that never overflows.
  • the acceleration values are converted into a floating point form at step 1212 .
  • Gain and offset errors can be corrected in this step.
  • This routine also computes the magnitude of the acceleration as the square root of the sum of the squares of the three components.
  • Step 1214 calculates the current position from the acceleration data.
  • the gravity acceleration vector is used as a vertical reference for the purpose of determining how tilted the camera platform is. Valves of pitch and roll, P 0 and RV, are computed which, when applied to the camera's present pitch and roll, give a level reference platform. The program that performs this calculation is set forth below.
  • the values of acceleration are “ac->p.f” for the y value of acceleration and “ac->p.l” for the X value of acceleration (the z value is not needed).
  • This program computes P ⁇ and R ⁇ , and it acquires the initial yaw value as W ⁇ .
  • r ⁇ and p ⁇ values allows the definition of a reference frame for integration in which the transformed X and Y acceleration components have no contribution from the gravitational force.
  • X and Y in the reference frame are perpendicular to the direction of the gravity vector, while Z in the reference frame is parallel to the gravity vector.
  • GetRollPitchZero also averages P ⁇ and R ⁇ readings on all subsequent calls after the first call to achieve better and better estimates for these values.
  • step 1320 since the only acceleration is that of gravity, we assume that the camera is motionless, and we arbitrarily set the velocity values in all three directions to zero. This assumption holds because the camera is hand-held and is never stable when the human carrier is in motion. If the camera were mounted upon some conveyance that can move very smoothly at a uniform velocity, then this assumption would not hold, and some additional data indicating the velocity of the camera would have to be recorded. In an airplane or automobile, for example, the speedometer reading or ground speed reading could be recorded to assume that this algorithm functions properly.
  • step 1318 the current pitch, yaw, and roll are transformed into coordinates that indicate these parameters relative to the newly-defined reference frame. This step 1318 is always performed regardless of whether the magnitude of the acceleration matches that of gravity.
  • the yaw, pitch, and roll values which are presently referenced to a horizontal plane, must be converted into what is called the quaternion form. This is a four dimensional vector with three imaginary components and one real component. This is done to facilitate the transformation of the acceleration values, which are presently referenced to the tilted camera plane, into valves referenced to the horizontal reference plane (just defined, preparatory to integrating the acceleration values to produce velocity and displacement values.
  • the input variable is a record “AttitudeRecord” which contains yaw “w”, pitch “p”, and roll “r”.
  • the returned quaternion values are “s”, “i”, “j”, and “k”, where “s” is the real value and the others are the imaginary values.
  • the acceleration vector is transformed from the camera body coordinate frame into the stable reference frame.
  • step 1326 the integration of the transformed acceleration values is carried out as follows:
  • the quaternion coordinate transformation process is carried out by using two cross multiplications, and is illustrated below:
  • the incoming arguments to this function are a three-dimensional vector “v” that is to be rotated and a four-dimensional quaternion vector “q” that defines the rotation.
  • the three-dimensional vector “v” is first transformed into a four-dimensional vector “vq” with the fourth component “vq.s” set to zero.
  • an inverse “qi” is formed of the quaternion “q”.
  • the incoming vector “vq” is quaternion multiplied by the inverse quaternion vector “qi;”.
  • the result of this multiplication “rq” is then quaternion multiplied by the quaternion vector “qi”
  • Three components of the resulting vector, which is returned as “vq”, are transferred back into the vector “rp” which is returned as the transformed result.
  • the quaternion multiplication is defined by the following program: void QuaternionMultiply (QuaternionRecord *q,
  • step 1122 in FIG. 10 The details of the step 1122 in FIG. 10 relating to the writing out of a record 775 ( FIG. 8 ) are set forth in FIG. 14 .
  • step 1402 if any frame numbers were skipped, at step 1122 a position record is generated and saved for each such skipped frame. Since there are more acceleration records than there are video frames, step 1408 tests to see if the current frame number has already been written out as a position record. If not, then a new position record 775 is written out at step 1410 along with the frame number. In any case, at step 1412 , the position record is saved for possible future use if any frames were skipped (at step 1402 during a future iteration).
  • the preferred embodiment of the invention simultaneously writes out records of the type 715 ( FIG. 8 ) into a separate positional database (not shown) having the file name extension “*.TEL”. In this manner, two positional databases are created, one specifying camera attitude using the direct angular notation format, and the other specifying camera attitude using the quaternion notation format.
  • the camera is assumed to be at rest. If the magnitude is outside this range the velocity is set to be the average velocity of a person walking. The camera is pointed in the direction the operator is walking whenever the operator moves, and this velocity vector is transformed using, the same quaternion as the acceleration measurement above.
  • the velocity vector is rotated in the following code fragment:
  • FIG. 13 shows the flow diagram for the alternate position calculation method.
  • FIG. 13 is to be substituted for FIG. 12 in the program flow described above.
  • the box in FIG. 12 labeled 1324 is replaced by a box 3380
  • the box labeled 1326 is replaced by a box 3390 .
  • box 3340 the absolute value of acceleration magnitude is compared to that of gravity plus a constant value. If the absolute value of the difference of these quantities is greater than zero, movement is indicated.
  • the forward velocity component pos->p.f is then set to a velocity value of “walking speed” in box 3350 . Otherwise forward component is set to 0 in box 3360 . In either case the left-right and up-down components are set to 0 in box 3370 .
  • the velocity estimate is then transformed from platform coordinates to reference coordinates in box 3380 .
  • the resulting transformed velocity is summed component-wise to produce the position estimate in box 3390 .
  • FIG. 13 These boxes in FIG. 13 are identical to their counterparts in FIG. 12 :
  • FIG. 13 box 3310 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1310 .
  • FIG. 13 box 3312 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1312 .
  • FIG. 13 box 3314 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1314 .
  • FIG. 13 box 3322 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1322 .
  • FIG. 15 sets forth all of the significant signal interconnections between the circuitry blocks.
  • the heart of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 is a control circuit 470 which contains a central processing unit 480 .
  • This central processing unit in the preferred embodiment, is a Z-WORLD SMART BLOCK, Model SB-DEV-32, programmable computer.
  • the central processing unit 480 provides addressing signals 1502 , data signals 1504 , and control signals 1506 to a control logic 490 .
  • the control logic 490 contains two programmable logic units PALS which respond to the signal from the CPU by generating all of the various control signals that are needed to run the tracking data acquisition unit 105 .
  • the rangefinder 485 is shown connected to the CPU 480 by means of two serial communication lines, an outgoing serial communication line TXA 1 carrying commands from the CPU 480 to the rangefinder 485 , and a return serial communication line RXA 1 carrying serial information from the rangefinder 485 back to the CPU 480 .
  • the rangefinder 485 returns gathered information periodically, at its own rate of speed.
  • the CPU 480 formulates a range packet 520 ( FIG. 4 ) containing a 24 byte range value 510 and an 8 byte gray scale value 515 , and adds it to the telemetry stream of data.
  • the two gyroscopes, the directional gyroscope 400 and the vertical gyroscope 410 are designed so that when they are deprived of power, they return to rest positions with the vertical gyroscope 410 having its axis vertically disposed and with the directional gyroscope 400 having axis horizontally disposed.
  • the central processing unit 480 causes the control logic 490 to generate a GYRON signal and to feed it to a gyroscope regulated power supply 420 .
  • the gyroscope power supply 420 generates a plus 10 volt, regulated +GYRO signal which feeds power to both of the gyroscopes 400 and 410 .
  • the gyroscope motors begin to spin so their axis are stabilized and so that the gimbals associated with the gyroscopes begin to generate pairs of quadrature modulated signals indicating the rotational motions of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 .
  • the directional gyroscope 400 generates two square wave signals in quadrature as the platform 415 is rotated about a vertical axis to the left or to the right. These quadrature signals, which may be called collectively the yaw signal, appear on the two wires DOA and DOB. These signals arise from sensors associated with the gimbals within the gyroscope 400 in response to rotation of the gimbals.
  • the vertical gyroscope 410 is similarly equipped with two sets of sensors associated with its gimbals to generate pitch and roll quadrature modulated signals.
  • the pitch signal which appears on the two wires V 1 A and V 1 B, indicates the rate at which the camera 100 is pointing more upwards towards the ceiling or more downwards towards the floor.
  • the roll, signal which appears on two wires V 0 A and V 0 B, indicates the rate at which the camera is tilting to one side or to the other, away from or towards the vertical.
  • the pitch and roll signals represented respectively by the V 1 A-V 1 B and by the V 0 A-V 0 B signal lines, operate in a manner identical to the yaw signal just described, with the information being conveyed by quadrature modulated square waves.
  • the three pairs of quadrature modulated signals V 1 A, V 1 B, V 0 A, V 0 B, and D 0 A, D 1 B are fed into respective quadrature decoders 450 , 455 and 460 .
  • the quadrature decoders 450 , 455 and 460 are conventional models, in this case Hewlett Packard Model No. HCTL 2020.
  • the three accelerometers 435 , 440 , and 445 are shown each generating an analog accelerometer output signal SIG 0 , SIG 1 , and SIG 2 and also a temperature signal TEMP 0 , TEMP 1 , and TEMP 2 . These signals flow into the multiplexer and A-to-D converter 465 .
  • the central processing unit 480 is enabled to obtain data indicating the distance of the subject from the rangefinder 485 ; it is enabled to obtain pitch, roll, and yaw data values from the vertical and directional gyroscopes 400 and 410 : and it is enabled to obtain data defining the instantaneous acceleration of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 from the accelerometers 435 , 440 and 445 in all three coordinate directions.
  • the CPU 480 continuously packages this information, as explained in steps 600 to 615 in FIG. 6 , into the frame data format that is illustrated at 535 or 550 in FIG. 4 . This frame data format information is presented in parallel, one byte at a time, over the data bus D 0 -D 6 to shift register and encoder 475 .
  • the shift register and encoder 475 converts the signal into a modulated serial tracking data signal which is presented over the audio data line 115 to the audio record input 125 of the VCR 130 .
  • the central processing until retrieves from the rangefinder 485 in serial form an 8 bit gray scale value 515 and a 24 bit range value 510 , as shown in 520 in FIG. 4 . It retrieves from the quadrature decoders 450 , 455 , and 460 associated with the directional and vertical gyroscopes 400 and 410 16 bit data values representing the current pitch, roll, and yaw as stored within counters within the quadrature decoders 450 , 455 and 460 . It retrieves from the X, Y, and Z accelerometers 435 , 445 , and 440 , 24-bit values representing the current instantaneous acceleration to which the tracking and data acquisition unit 105 is being subjected.
  • each packet thus begins with the frame ID pattern elements shown at 525 or 545 as three bytes of information. This is followed by the X acceleration data 500 A, the pitch data 505 A, the Y acceleration data 500 B, the roll data 505 B, the Z acceleration data 500 C, the yaw data 505 C, the range data 555 , and the gray scale data 560 , as shown in FIG. 4 .
  • This information is sent through to the shift register and encoder 475 and appears as a modulated tracking data signal on the audio line 115 which is then recorded by the VCR 130 along with the images flowing from the video camera 120 .
  • the video signal 150 flows directly into the personal computer 185 .
  • the modulated tracking data signal 145 flows to a demodulator 155 .
  • the unmodulated tracking data signal flows over a signal line 170 to the PC 185 .
  • FIG. 16 presents a block diagram view of the three programs that control the operation of the central processing unit 480 shown in FIG. 15 .
  • Two of these programs 2402 and 2404 are interrupt driven, and the third program 2406 either runs continuously, or it is called into operation periodically by a timer triggered interrupt or other similar mechanism.
  • the program 2406 begins at 2408 by initializing the system. Initialization includes such steps as turning on the power supply 420 for the gyroscopes, programming and initializing the three quadrature decoders 450 , 455 , and 460 , and setting up the analog to digital converter (within the block 465 in FIG. 15 ).
  • data is gathered from the rangefinder 485 .
  • the analog to digital converter is commanded to gather from the accelerometers 435 , 445 , and 440 the current acceleration of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 .
  • step 2054 the above data, together with previously stored values of yaw, roll, and pitch are combined into a data packet, with 4 bits of data per byte, as has been explained above (steps 600 , 605 , 610 , and 615 in FIG. 6 ; and see the data formats presented in FIG. 4 ).
  • the resulting data packet is placed into RAM memory as a series of bytes to await transmission to the shift register and encoder 475 .
  • the interrupt driven program 2402 is placed into service to transmit the bytes of data to the shift register and encoder 475 .
  • step 2060 the program 2406 tests to see if all of the data bytes have been transmitted. Alternatively, the program simply suspends itself until a fixed time interval has expired. In either case, after transmission is completed or after the expiration of the time interval, program control recommences with step 2050 .
  • the program 2406 thus continuously operates to assemble data packets and to transmit them to the shift register and encoder 475 where the data is modulated onto an audio signal suitable for recordation on the audio soundtrack of a VCR.
  • the program 2402 is an interrupt driven program placed into operation by the interrupt signal INT 1 every time the shift register and encoder 475 successfully transmits a byte of information.
  • this program simply sends a data byte from RAM to the shift register and encoder 475 until there are no more data bytes that remain to be transmitted.
  • This interrupt driven routine frees up the program 2406 from the time consuming task of continuously monitoring for when to transmit the next byte of data.
  • the program 2404 is also an interrupt driven program. It is placed into operation every time one of the three quadrature decoders receives a signal fluctuation from one of the gyroscopes. In response to INT 2 , this program gathers pitch, roll, and yaw values from the two gyroscopes and stores them in RAM for later transmission at step 2064 .
  • Three display programs are available for viewing the information stored in the positional database.
  • the spatial database program 335 ( FIG. 5 ) is controlled by a three-dimensional navigation tool, such as the SUN COM FLIGHT MAX JOY STICK, or any three-dimensional, commercially available game control device.
  • a three-dimensional navigation tool such as the SUN COM FLIGHT MAX JOY STICK, or any three-dimensional, commercially available game control device.
  • Each frame is displayed, and the user is asked whether he wants to select it.
  • a database of frames selected for display is created.
  • For each frame, a two-dimensional rectangle of fixed size is drawn using the WORLD TOOL KIT in a perspective view of three-dimensional space.
  • the rectangle is displayed in the simulation space in the orientation specified by the attitude of the camera positional frame record that corresponds to the video frame.
  • the rectangle is then textured with the video frame so the frames appear to float in space before the user.
  • the movie mapper program 325 is described in detail below.
  • the positional frame retrieval program 330 allows the user to identify a region in space on the camera path using the WORLD TOOLKIT.
  • the program defines a rectangular solid in space about each imaged object.
  • the location of each item imaged is computed from the data in each record. All the image records where the location of the item image falls outside of the rectangular solid for an item are discarded, and all remaining records are displayed as a movie view of the item from different perspectives. In essence, all available frames showing the item or the volume indicated are displayed sequentially, giving all the views available of the desired item or volume.
  • the data tracking and acquisition unit and modulator 105 has illustratively been shown connected to a rangefinder, receiving therefrom a serial data signal which is conveyed to the central computer for possible use in a data retrieval system.
  • the positional frame retrieval program 330 uses this range data to determine the position of imaged objects and to retrieve all images containing a designated object, as contrasted with the movie mapper program technique of retrieving images based upon camera position and orientation (described below).
  • an object 3202 is shown within a camera path 3204 along which the camera orientation at the moment of image capture is indicated by vectors 3206 .
  • the vectors shown connected by dotted lines 3208 to the object 3202 represent the capture of an image of the object 3202 .
  • Range information is also captured indicating how far the object 3202 is from the camera at each of these points.
  • the retrieval program 330 in response to a mouse click at the position of the object, may locate all records 775 which, from position, camera angle, and distance to subject, relate to images of that object. These may be grouped into an object database and displayed as a video movie, as described above.
  • data may be captured from these other devices.
  • data may be captured from a gas chromatograph or from a chemical sniffer. Sound may be recorded from a microphone. Average light intensity may be recorded from a photo cell. Infrared records of motion in the vicinity may be recorded. Data may be gathered from stationary machinery or data collection devices, such as flow meters or temperature sensors. Any type of data that has a spatial reference may be gathered in this manner.
  • FIG. 17 Another embodiment of the invention is shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the computer 185 contains a positional database 322 established previously, in accordance with the teachings set forth above.
  • the positional frame retrieval program 330 is actively retrieving images from the databases 322 and displaying them.
  • the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 is not attached to the camera, but is attached by a serial communicator tether 3102 (which could include a radio linkage) directly to the serial port of the computer 185 , such that the tracking and video data entry and storage program continuously accepts the data and stores it in the tracking database 324 .
  • the tracking data acquisition unit is thus enabled to be used as a mouse pointing device for the positional frame retrieval program 330 to guide in the retrieval and display of images—an inertial joystick.
  • the tracking database 324 may be on the hard disk as previously, but preferably it is a RAM circular buffer that is shared by the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310 .
  • the tracking data values may be sent as messages between the two programs running under Windows and subject to the standard Windows message dispatcher (not shown). Both of the programs 305 and 310 can be simplified, since neither is dealing with video or with frame numbers in this embodiment.
  • the tracking database to positional database conversion program operates continuously, receiving tracking data containing unnormalized acceleration and orientation data and converting it into normalized position and orientation data, and sending the resulting data directly to the positional frame retrieval program 330 , thereby causing the program 330 to update the display continuously in response to manual movement of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 through time and space.
  • a first portable computer (not shown) can be attached to the tracking data acquisitional unit and modulator 105 can contain the program elements 305 , 324 , 310 and 330 , shown in FIG. 17 .
  • This computer continuously computes the coordinates and position of itself in time and space and broadcasts this information by means of a radio LAN or serial port, for example, to a stationary computer that contains the positional database 322 .
  • the stationary computer broadcasts back the database information to the portable computer, where it is displayed.
  • a virtual world can be created where the one carrying around the portable computer can view a universe that exists in virtual form on the disk and that was recorded earlier at this or some other location.
  • the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 in FIG. 17 can be equipped with a video monitor receiving video signals from the computer 185 (by television transmission over a radio link, for example). Then one may wander about with the television and tracking data acquisition unit viewing a virtual reality derived from the positional database 322 .
  • the arrangement illustrated in FIG. 17 can also be used as a three-dimensional pointing device for programs other than the positional frame retrieval program. Any kind of three-dimensional software program requiring the assistance of a navigation tool having either three or six degrees of freedom may be readily modified to accept the positional data records generated at 3104 by the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 .
  • FIGS. 19 to 35 Another embodiment of the invention utilizes a movie mapper 325 ( FIGS. 19 to 35 ) to assist the user in retrieving and displaying the images.
  • the program structure defined by a series of nested objects, is depicted in overview in FIG. 26 .
  • the dynamics of event message transmission between objects is depicted in FIG. 27 , and the most important data structures are in accordance with previously-described FIGS. 5 and 8 .
  • FIGS. 34 to 40 and 43 to 46 disclose a series of operating states and menus of the program.
  • the program 325 is written in Microsoft C++ to run under Microsoft Windows, Version 3.1. Some of the programs call upon routines contained within the Microsoft Video For Windows Development Kit, Version 1.1. All of the above may be obtained from Microsoft Corporation, 1 Microsoft Way, Redmond, Wash. 98052.
  • the Media Control Interface “MCIWind” 10944 ( FIG. 26 ) from the Video For Windows package is used to control the scrolling through the playback of video images within the AVI (audio video interleave) video child window, MCIView 10940 , described below.
  • a main frame window 10100 opens up.
  • the user first actuates the File popdown menu and calls for the display of an AVI file (a Microsoft Audio Video Interleave file).
  • AVI file a Microsoft Audio Video Interleave file
  • These files have file names with the suffix “.AVI”. In all respects, these files correspond to all of Microsoft's specifications.
  • the program 325 opens up the selected “*.AVI” file. It also looks for and attempts to open a telemetry file, containing the positional information, which has the same name and the file name suffix “*.TLA”.
  • the “*.TLA” file must be prepared for this program by adding to the beginning of the file a single line of text. The line is “HDR ⁇ tab > ⁇ last frame number>” where ⁇ tab> is the tab character, and ⁇ last frame number> is the first number on the last line of the file. If no “*.TLA” file is found, the system issues an error message but permits one to browse through the “*.AVI” file in the normal Microsoft manner.
  • the program also looks for and attempts to open an “*.MTA” file for its own use in defining overlay characteristics.
  • the File popdown menu contains the usual list of Microsoft options, including Open AVI, Print, Print Preview, Print Setup, Exit, and a numbered list of recently opened AVI files to facilitate recalling a file recently opened.
  • the figures illustrate what happens when an AVI file BACK.AVI and its corresponding telemetry file BACK.TLA were successfully opened.
  • the program 325 Upon opening this file, the program 325 causes a Video child window 10110 to be opened, displaying in this case a view of the back yard of a private home. This video window is labelled at the top with “BLACK.AVI—Video” to identify both the file and the fact that this is the child window.
  • the child window 10110 provides controls that are standard Microsoft controls for scrolling through a sequence of video images. These include a VCR-like control 10108 . Clicking on this control starts the video playback if it is stopped, and stops it if it is running.
  • the control is marked with a square when the video is playing, and it is marked with a triangle (shown) when the video is stopped.
  • the Video popdown menu contains selections for changing the size of the video window to the original size, half the original size, or double the original size.
  • a mouse-actuated slider control 10103 ( FIG. 19 ) permits the user to position the video playback to any frame of the temporal video sequence. All of these functions are provided by Microsoft's utilities.
  • a View pulldown menu permits additional child windows to be opened that relate to the position information.
  • the View menu provides the following options, which are described below:
  • Actuating the Plan command causes a plan view: XY child window 10120 to open up, displaying the path 10123 over which the camera was moved during the process of recording the sequential images.
  • This window is labeled: “BACK.AVI—Plan View: XY” to identify the file name as well as the nature of the view.
  • a large red dot 10128 identifies the precise position along the path 10123 where the camera was positioned when it recorded the image shown in the view window 10110 .
  • Smaller red dots 10126 and 10127 identify side frames which are shown to the left and right of the main frame when the “Triple Mci” View menu item is selected.
  • Red dots show the field of view (fov) of the camera 10129 , giving an indication of the direction the camera is pointing.
  • a series of red dots indicate the camera's track. These red dots are spaced apart to produce a dotted line effect following the path of the camera as it moves along the path in the X and Y directions. The color of the remaining points along the track is blue.
  • Elevational View: XZ child window 10130 Activating the Elevation command causes an Elevational View: XZ child window 10130 to open up, displaying the camera path of movement as seen from the side, rather than from the top.
  • the display in all other respects is identical to the plan view display just described.
  • Activating the Yaw command causes a Yaw View child window 10140 to open up, displaying the various yaw directions the camera assumed during the image recording process. Yaw may be thought of as compass direction.
  • Pitch is inclination of the camera in the vertical image plane, that is looking up and down. In this example, the images do not vary significantly in pitch.
  • Roll is the tilt of the image plane from side to side, or leaning.
  • the user may signal the program to switch to displaying the image closest to the point where the mouse pointer was clicked and having the desired position, angle, or orientation.
  • This selection process provides a rapid method for retrieving and positioning the video for playback based upon the desired position of the camera when an image was captured.
  • Activating the Orientation View command causes a child window 10180 to open up, displaying the orientation of the camera (pitch, roll, and yaw) graphically.
  • the positive Y direction is indicated by the line 10181 , with the negative Y direction indicated by the line 10182 .
  • the line 10181 indicating positive Y is Bold, to serve as a reference line.
  • the positive X direction is indicated by the line 10185
  • negative X is indicated by the line 10186
  • the positive Z direction is indicated by the line 10188
  • the negative Z direction is indicated by the line 10187 .
  • the dotted line 10184 is a projection of the camera direction line 10183 onto the X-Y plane. As a sequence of images is displayed in response to actuation of the play control 10108 , the red-blue line 10183 swings about, indicating the orientation of the camera, and the dotted line 10184 swings about below (or above) the line 10183 like a shadow at noontime on the equator.
  • Roll is represented by the ratio of blue and red portions of the line 10183 . If the roll value is zero, then the line is half red and half blue. Roll in a clockwise direction increases the blue, while roll in a counterclockwise direction increases the red. A positive roll gives more red.
  • a toolbar containing push button controls ( 10141 , 10142 , etc.) appears in the window 10101 and may be selectively displayed or hidden by actuating the Toolbar command in the View pulldown menu.
  • the push button 10141 is an alternate way to open a file.
  • the push buttons 10142 and 10145 respectively wind to the first and the last frames, and the push buttons 10143 and 10144 respectively move back and forward by one frame at a time.
  • the push button 10146 zooms in, and the push button 10147 zooms out.
  • These two push buttons control the portion of the video path that is displayed by the Plan View and Elevational View child windows 10120 and 10130 , and the orientations shown in the Yaw View, the Pitch View, and the Roll View.
  • the user uses the mouse to position the cursor and then, with the left mouse button held down, drags the cursor diagonally so that a mouse-defined rectangle 10122 is created within the child window 10120 .
  • the user clicks the zoom in push button 10146 .
  • the Plan View: XY window's contents are then replaced by the contents of the marked rectangle, expanded out to fill the window ( FIG. 28 ).
  • the Elev View XZ window's X axis is simultaneously zoomed, while the Z axis (vertical) is left as before.
  • the points in the XY view which were outside the rectangle 10122 are excluded from the elevational view.
  • any angle not represented in the selected set of points is excluded from the Yaw View, the Pitch View, and the Roll View. This process may be repeated as often as desired, until only a few camera positions are shown individually in the display.
  • the user may also create a rectangle within the Elev: XZ window, if desired.
  • the zoom-in push button 10146 is actuated, the selected rectangle fills the XZ window, and the X axis of the XY window is zoomed in the X axis only. Points not within the XZ selection rectangle are then excluded from the elevational view.
  • the user may also create a rectangle in the Yaw View window 10140 , the Pitch View window 10150 , or the Roll View window 10160 , if desired.
  • the zoom-in push button 10146 is actuated, the selected rectangle fills the window, and the Yaw, Pitch, or Roll values displayed within the selected rectangle expand to fill the display.
  • Pitch View, and Roll View windows are excluded from the Plan View window and Elev XZ window.
  • Actuation of the zoom-out push button 10147 causes the plan and elevational displays to return to their original appearance (as shown in FIG. 19 ).
  • Actuating the Overlay Visibility . . . menu selection from the View menu causes the display of an Overlay Visibility dialog window 11110 ( FIG. 29 ).
  • the Overlay Visibility dialog lists five overlay items:—“Tombstones” 11120 , “Entrances” 11130 , “Exits” 11140 , “Launch Pads” 11150 , and “Grid ( 5 ” 11160 —each of which may be selected for display in the Video windows or the Plan View window.
  • a check box for each item is provided under the Video and Plan columns of the dialog 11122 , 11124 , 11132 , 11134 , 11142 , 11144 , 11152 , 11154 , 11162 .
  • Check boxes under the Video column 11170 control display of items in the Video window 10110 , while those in the Plan column 11180 control display of items in the Plan View window 10120 .
  • the check box has an X in it, any overlay item of the corresponding type which may appropriately be displayed according to the current state of the program is displayed in the Video or Plan View window. Likewise, removing the X from the checkbox inhibits display of the corresponding line item.
  • the final command in the View popdown menu is the Status command, which hides or displays a status line at the bottom of the window 10190 and which indicates such things as the frame number and the X, Y, Z, Yaw, Pitch, and Roll coordinates of the camera corresponding to the image that is being displayed.
  • the Frame pop down menu displays the following commands, all of which relate to simply positioning the video as if it were a continuous video tape recording:
  • Frame pop down menu displays the following commands which have a special meaning:
  • the Loop Forward function may alternatively be started and stopped by striking the space bar. Each strike toggles the Loop Forward function between the started and stopped state.
  • the Action Menu has functions corresponding to the Toolbar buttons Zoom In 10146 and Zoom Out 10147 . It also has functions corresponding to the Head Forward button 10148 and Head Back button 10149 . Finally the Adjust Parameters function brings up a dialog box 10310 ( FIG. 21 ) by which various parameters to be described later are adjusted.
  • the Head Forward 10148 and Head Back 10149 buttons and functions allow the user to move forward or back up from the currently displayed frame.
  • the Head Forward frame and Head Back frame are shown as green dots 10123 and 10124 on the Plan View window, and as green rectangles 10420 and 10422 ( FIG. 22 ) superimposed on the Video window.
  • the Head Forward rectangle 10420 is projected onto the Video window and is superimposed on a spot on the Video window which corresponds to its spatial location as determined by the database.
  • the Head Backward rectangle 10422 encloses the entire video area of the Video window.
  • the Head Forward frame is chosen by the program such that when it is displayed the appearance to the user is that the user has moved forward. This frame is selected in the following manner. Search all the frames in the telemetry file (*.tla) and determine which are within the front field of view angle from the perspective of the current frame.
  • the front field of view is defined here. Define a ray with its origin at the current frame's x-y location and extending in the direction of the yaw angle, called the centerline of the frame. Define a pair of rays with the same origin, called left and right lines of the frame, which make an angle with the centerline specified by the user in the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog ( FIG. 21 ) Field of View Angle +/ ⁇ item 10312 . Define a Field of View (fov) of the current frame between the left and right lines of the frame. All frame points which lie within the field of view are said to be frames within the current frame's field of view.
  • the weight given this distance error is proportional to the value of the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Selecting Side Angles scroll bar item 10340 ( FIG. 21 ). This allows the operator to adjust the importance of the minimization of yaw differences or distance from the circle.
  • the Head Back frame is calculated in an similar manner to that used to the Head Forward frame with the exception that this frame must lie in the rear field of view.
  • the rear field of view is a yaw angle range that can be found by reflecting the front field of view angle range to the back of the current frame. These fields of view are the same magnitude and face in opposite directions.
  • the yaw angle goal is equal to the yaw angle of the current frame.
  • the keyboard Up-arrow-key and letter I key also execute the Head Forward function
  • the keyboard Down-arrow-key and letter K key also execute the Head Back function.
  • the View menu-Triple Mci function causes the MCIview window to expand to include three video windows ( FIG. 20 ).
  • the one in the center is the same.
  • the left and right windows contain frames of video selected from the data set on the basis of their proximity to the best theoretical frames to display both in x-y-z and in centerline.
  • the frame on the left is chosen so that its centerline is close to twice the fov of the center frame.
  • the frame on the right is chosen so that its centerline is close to twice the fov of the center frame, but in a direction to the right of the center frame's centerline.
  • a left frame would be searched for in the database with a center line of approximately 60 degrees less than the centerline of the current frame.
  • the left and right frames are aligned with the center frames based on the fov and on the yaw and pitch values of the centerlines of the frames.
  • the fov defines a “pixel per degree” displacement on the screen. For each degree the left or right frame's centerline disagrees with the predicted centerline (center frame's centerline plus or minus twice the fov) the frame is shifted a corresponding number of pixels. Likewise, the frame is shifted up or down by the pixel per degree amount by which the frame's pitch differs from the center frame's pitch.
  • the left arrow key and the J key on the keyboard select a new frame for viewing.
  • the frame selected is the displayed left frame described above.
  • the 0 through 9 keys allow the selection of a frame (if one exists) which has a centerline less than twice the fov angle. Pressing the 1 key sets the goal centerline angle to the centerline angle of the current frame plus or minus 10 percent of twice the fov angle.
  • the 2 key similarly sets the goal centerline angle to 20 percent of twice the fov angle.
  • the 0 key sets the goal centerline angle to 100 percent of twice the fov angle. Note that this setting yields the frame which precisely abuts the center frame, since points on the edge of the center frame lie on a vertical plane extending from the current point of view which makes an angle of exactly “fov” degrees with the current frame centerline.
  • An overlay item represents a point or area of interest of the database as projected onto the current frame.
  • the overlay items which represent frames are the jump forward rectangle 10420 ( FIG. 22 ), the jump backward rectangle 10422 ( FIG. 22 ), the jump and turn left diamond 10424 ( FIG. 22 ), the jump and turn right diamond 10426 ( FIG. 22 ), the turn left triangle 11210 ( FIG. 30 ), and the turn right triangle 11220 ( FIG. 30 ). (See also 10220 in FIG. 20 where the left-turn triangle is shown in the panoramic view.)
  • one or more frames may be defined as Entrance frames, marked on the Video Overlay window with an Entrance item 11230 ( FIG. 30 ).
  • An Entrance frame is a frame which is displayed as a result of the operator causing the viewer program to access a frame indexed within an area of the database known as an Exit area. The Exit area is described below. Like the Jump Forward frame, for example, the Entrance frame replaces the current frame in the video display window.
  • An entrance frame may be contained within the same database which is currently being viewed, or may be from a different database. An entrance frame may be identified by the operator at any time by invoking the Objects-Create Entrance dialog 11300 ( FIG. 31 ).
  • the current frame is marked in the *.mta file associated with the currently open database with the operator supplied tag entered by the operator in the Entrance Name item 11320 ( FIG. 31 ) of the Objects-Create Entrance dialog 11300 ( FIG. 31 ).
  • the Frame Number 11310 ( FIG. 31 ) is supplied by the program when the dialog is invoked.
  • An Exit item marks an area of the Plan View containing frames of the current database which when viewed will cause the display of an associated Entrance frame.
  • a Launch Pad area item 10722 causes the execution of an associated application program whenever a frame is displayed whose coordinates lie within the area defined for the Launch Pad area.
  • An Exit area is defined by the operator's actions:
  • the dialog's Destination File item 10510 ( FIG. 23 ) identifies the *.mta file associated with the database containing the desired Entrance, the named entrance which was defined by the procedure above.
  • the Destination Name item 10520 selects the tag for the desired Entrance frame which was previously identified using the procedure described above for defining Entrance frames.
  • a Launch Pad item is defined in a similar fashion.
  • Each of these overlay items is projected onto the current video frame according to the overlay calculation code described above.
  • the Window pop down menu provides conventional Microsoft Windows window control functions that need not be described here.
  • the Help popdown menu also needs no special explanation.
  • FIG. 26 The object program structure of the movie mapper 325 is described in overview in FIG. 26 , and the message paths connecting these program object elements are shown in FIG. 27 .
  • FIGS. 19 to 35 present a full overview of the program 325 .
  • the operating program is composed of a number of objects each of which is an instance of some class of objects. These objects are represented by rectangles in FIGS. 26 and 27 . Objects sometimes create subsidiary objects. When this happens, the subsidiary objects are represented in FIG. 26 by smaller rectangles contained within the larger object rectangles that gave rise to them. Each object has properties which correspond to its particular class. Each object class has a name, and the properties of the class are defined by separate program listings for each class. To aid the reader in pursuing these programs, FIG. 26 presents the hierarchical arrangement of the objects that are present in the program 325 when it is actually operating. The class name of each object appears within the rectangle for the object.
  • CVidApp 10902 When the program commences operating, it first appears as an object named CVidApp 10902 ( FIG. 26 ). This object then creates a frame window derived from the Microsoft class CMainFrame 10905 . This CMainFrame object appears on the screen as a large window frame 10100 (see FIG. 19 ) that includes a menu bar, a tool bar, and a status line, as has been described.
  • This CMainFrame object next launches a child frame derived from Microsoft's CMDIChildWnd that is of the class CMDITextWnd 10938 .
  • This object gives rise to a child window that is modified from the Microsoft original in that its title line (positioned above the window) may be dynamically altered while the program is in operation.
  • This first child object launches within itself an instance of the CMCIView 10940 object, which launches MCIWnd 10944 to display the sequence of video images.
  • the CMciView object 10944 also launches a CMCIWnd object 10950 .
  • the CMCIWnd object 10950 attaches itself to the MCIWnd object 10944 so that Windows operating system events come to the CMCIWnd 10950 object instead of being sent directly to the MCIWnd object 10944 . In most cases the CMCIWnd 10950 object merely forwards the events to the MCIWnd object 10944 .
  • the CMCIWnd object 10950 intercepts mouse events, so that it may sense operator clicks on the overlay objects.
  • the CMCIWnd object 10950 also intercepts MCIWnd redraw requests, forwards these requests to MCIWnd 10944 for video refresh, and then redraws the overlay objects associated with the video frame being displayed.
  • CMciView and MCIView objects are the lower-most of the seven objects shown in FIG. 26 within the CMainFrame object 10905 . Accordingly, the user sees upon the screen a large window 10100 ( FIG. 19 ) within which a small window 10110 appears having video playback control 10108 .
  • Each of these windows corresponds to an additional pair of nested objects which appear within the CMainFrame object 10905 shown in FIG. 26 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10906 containing the object CPlanView 10920 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905 , and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10120 in FIG. 19 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10911 containing the object CElevView 10935 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905 , and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10130 in FIG. 19 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10914 containing the object COrientView 10945 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905 , and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10180 in FIG. 19 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10918 containing the object CYawView 10910 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905 , and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10140 in FIG. 19 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10923 containing the object CPitchView 10925 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905 , and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10195 in FIG. 19 .
  • the object CMDITextWnd 10923 containing the object CRollView 10915 is created within the CMainFrame object, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10160 in FIG. 19 .
  • the objects once created, send messages back and forth to each other over the paths illustrated in FIG. 27 .
  • the following discussion does not consider messages directed to the window frames (to adjust the frame size, for example) and to the child window frame object instances CMDITextWnd, which are not shown to simplify FIG. 27 .
  • the user When the user “talks” to the program, using the keyboard or mouse, in general the user communicates with the active window (in the case of the keyboard) or the window that the mouse is in (in the case of the mouse), selecting a different active window by clicking within the window boundaries.
  • the nine windows shown in FIG. 19 to which the user “talks” correspond to the ten objects numbered 10905 , 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , 10944 , 10945 , and 10950 in FIGS. 26 and 27 . So these ten objects receive messages from the user and must respond.
  • the central coordinating object is the document object, which is an instance of CVidDoc 10927 which is derived from the class Cdocument (a Microsoft class).
  • This object contains the key system variables that determine the state of the system. Included, as illustrated in FIG. 27 , are the name of the file being processed, the number of the current frame being displayed, the current zoom level, the minimum and maximum values of coordinates that are used in the displays, and an object 10909 which is an instance of the class Tla_File, which stores and manipulates the positional data. (The minimum and maximum values of the coordinates are derived from the file data itself as the extreme values found within this object.)
  • any window receives a message that calls for adjustment of one of the key system variables, that message is sent immediately to the document object CVidDoc 10907 .
  • the value of the key variable is adjusted, and then the document object 10907 broadcasts an “Update All Views” message over the path 10980 to the MCIWnd child window object 10944 , over path 10911 to object 10910 , over path 10921 to object 10920 , over path 10926 to object 10925 , over path 10916 to object 10915 , over path 10936 to object 10935 , over path 10941 to object 10940 , and over path 10946 to object 10945 .
  • the “Update All Views” message contains a hint that says either:
  • the individual window objects next communicate with the document object 10907 over paths 10911 , 10916 , 10921 , 10926 , 10936 , 10941 , and 10946 and receive information via paths 10912 , 10917 , 10922 , 10927 , 10937 , 10942 , and 10947 to learn of the new state of the system and to retrieve from the document object 10907 whatever data they need to update their respective windows. For example, if the user at 10902 clicks upon the “zoom out” push button 10146 ( FIG. 19 ), this action is communicated to the object CMainFrame 10905 associated with the outer window frame.
  • the object 10905 communicates this message over the path 10904 to the document object 10907 .
  • the Zoom Level variable is updated within the object 10907 , and an “Update All Views—Rewrite Everything” message is broadcast over the paths 10911 , 10916 , 10921 , 10926 , 10936 , 10941 , 10946 , and 10980 to the remaining objects, except for the CMciWnd object 10950 .
  • This object receives its update messages before they are sent to the MCIWnd object 10944 , and are re-routed by the operating system.
  • each of the objects 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , and 10945 must send messages to the document object 10907 requesting all of the positional information (from “Tla_File”) so that they may repaint their plots of camera motion. They also request the current frame number so that they can color the plot of the current frame position red in color.
  • the object 10944 which simply needs to recompute and display the camera's orientation when capturing the current frame, simply requests the current frame number and the positional data relevant to that one frame. The object 10944 , after verifying that the current frame value has not changed, simply does nothing in this case.
  • Double clicking on the path in one of the windows 10110 , 10120 , 10130 , 10140 , 10150 , 10160 , and 10180 causes one of the objects 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , or 10945 to send a message to the document object 10907 reporting a new value for the current frame number.
  • the document object broadcasts over the paths 10912 , 10917 , 10922 , 10927 , 10937 , 10942 , 10947 , and 10981 the message “Update All Views—Rewrite Everything” to the objects 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , 10944 and 10945 .
  • the objects 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , and 10945 redraw their plots totally, requesting the necessary data from the document object 10907 .
  • the CMCIView object 10940 after determining, that the current frame had changed, would request the display of the designated new frame by the MCIWnd object from Microsoft 10944 . That request is intercepted by CMciWnd object 10950 , which refreshes the overlay after the MCIWnd object 10944 finishes its update.
  • CMciWnd object 10950 When the user clicks upon one of the positioning controls 10142 , 10143 , 10144 , or 10145 in the tool bar ( FIG. 19 ), these actions are communicated over the path 10903 to the CMainFrame object 10905 which, in a similar manner, sends a frame update message over the path 10904 to the document object 10907 and triggers a similar response to that just described.
  • the user When the user activates the video controls within the child window 10110 ( FIG. 19 ) that contains the video image, the user is communicating directly with the Microsoft MCIWind object 10944 .
  • This object updates the display of the image as requested and sends a message indicating the new frame number to the object CMCIView 10940 .
  • the object 10940 must then communicate this action to the document object 10907 over the path 10942 .
  • the document object 10907 broadcasts a message over the paths 10912 , 10917 , 10922 , 10927 , 10937 , 10942 , 10947 , and 10980 “Update All Views—Just Do Current Frame.” Accordingly, the objects 10910 , 10915 , 10920 , 10925 , 10935 , 10940 , and 10945 need simply to request information concerning the new current frame.
  • the program provides the facility of navigating through the video database by selecting frames of data from the database which represent translations and rotations from the position of the current frame's point of view.
  • the program searches the database for frames which best meet the criteria, and the operator then selects one of these frames using the keys or mouse as described above.
  • the following paragraphs describe the method the program uses to select the best frame for each of the possible operator choices (turn left, turn right, jump forward, jump backward, jump forward and simultaneously turn right, jump forward and simultaneously turn left).
  • Cw_slope is clockwise
  • ccw_slope is counterclockwise
  • Fov is the slope data for the current frame.
  • LeftDiag is the slope data for the frame to the left of the current frame, its centerline close to twice the fov counterclockwise of the current frame's centerline.
  • RightDiag is the slope data for the frame to the right of the current frame, its centerline close to twice the fov clockwise of the current frame's centerline.
  • m_PtLeftDiag NO_FRAMES
  • m_PtRightDiag NO_FRAMES
  • the search may be limited to a subset of the all the frames in the database, if the operator has zoomed in on one of the data windows (Plan View, Elev. View, Yaw View, Pitch View, Roll View).
  • IndexCurrentSlope ((float)index_y ⁇ current_y) / (index_x ⁇ current_x); ⁇ ⁇ Test the indexed point to find if it is in the front or rear field of view (fov) of the current frame, in the RightDiag's fov, or in the LeftDiag's fov. Jump and turn right's frame will be selected from the RightDiag fov. Jump and turn left's frame will be selected from the LeftDiag fov. (FIG. 34, step 11650) // So, is the indexed point within the FRONT field of view of current point? // Is it between the cw and ccw slope limits? If so, then in fov // Note.
  • x,y are data x,y, not display pixel x,y.
  • WeightedRadiusDistanceRating (float)(fabs(NeighborRadiusSquared ⁇ DistanceSquared) * DistanceGain); Test index point to see if it is better than the current candidate for the jump forward or jump backward selection.
  • x,y are data x,y, not display pixel x,y.
  • First quadrant is pos x and pos y.
  • the overlay window relates points and areas in the geometric space defined by the camera's movements to points and areas within a particular video frame. Geometric points and areas within the geometric space are projected to the camera's image plane using the following formula (In this code fragment the calculation is done for a Tombstone type overlay, but the calculation is the same for any overlay object.): First, get the difference between the camera frame's x position and the overlay object's's x position. (FIG.
  • numerator ⁇ (m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].XCtr ⁇ m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_x_data(ThisWndsFrame) ); Next, get the difference between the camera frame's y position and the overlay object's y position. (FIG.
  • denominator (m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m Tombstone[index].YCtr ⁇ m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_y_data(ThisWndsFrame) ); Calculate yaw angle of the line from the current frame's center to the point of interest. (FIG.
  • pitchFrameToOverlay CalcOverlayMarkers(&MarkerHalfWidth, &MarkerHalfHeight, m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].XCtr, m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].YCtr, ThisWndsFrame ); This program segment calculates the point on the vertical line determined by yaw angle from the current frame's centerline at which to project an x,y coordinate onto the current video frame. It presumes that the photographed space is planar and is not inclined with respect to the gravitational normal.
  • CameraHeight setting adjustable by the operator via the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Camera Height Above Floor entry 10316 (FIG. 21). // calculate angle between horizon and line from camera (at m_pDoc—>m_tla_flle.m_CameraHeight off flat floor) // to a particular overlay marker. Flat floor assumes z doesn't change too much.

Abstract

An image system which captures, along with the images, information defining both the position and the orientation of the camera along with the distance to the subject. A video camera is attached to three accelerometers, two gyroscopes, and a rangefinder. Data gathered from these devices and defining the pitch, yaw, and roll of the camera, the camera's acceleration, and the distance to the subject is captured and recorded along with video images. The video images are later stored within a computer's data base along with data defining the position and orientation of the camera and the distance to the subject for each image, this latter data being computed from the captured data. The images may then be presented to the user in a three-dimensional display in which the user can navigate through the images using a joystick device, with the images located in positions corresponding to the positions in space of the objects that were imaged.

Description

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
This application is a continuation reissue application of reissue application Ser. No. 12/126,664, filed May 23, 2008, to be issued as U.S. Pat. No. Re. 42,289, which is a reissue application of application Ser. No. 09/723,767, filed Nov. 28, 2000, issued on May 23, 2006 as U.S. Pat. No. 7,050,102, which is a continuation application of application Ser. No. 08/894,206, filed Jul. 30, 1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,195,122, which is a 35 U.S.C. § 371 national stage U.S. application corresponding to Patent Cooperation Treaty application PCT/US96/01434, filed on Jan. 31, 1996, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/383,471, filed on Jan. 31, 1995, which is hereby incorporated by reference. In particular, the '471 application contains a more detailed description of the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 (in '471 application FIGS. 16 to 23 and the accompanying text) and exemplary program listings (presented in the Appendices of the '471 application) which may be of interest to those seeking a more detailed understanding of the present invention.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates to referencing, sorting, and displaying images in a three-dimensional system. More particularly, it relates to a system having an image capturing device that captures images of objects together with spatial reference information defining the absolute position of the image capturing device and the relative position of the object relative to that device. It also relates to image retrieval and display, where the spatial reference information associated with each image facilitates browsing through the images in an organized manner.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The editing of films and video images, i.e., to rearrange action sequences, is well known. However, the movie and video cameras used to capture the images that are later edited do not store with those images any machine-understandable record of image and camera position. Accordingly, the edited films and videos permit one to view the images in only one predetermined order, determined by the editor. If some other ordering of the image presentation is desired, it must be achieved through a difficult manual editing process.
A computerized, interactive editing process is described in a doctoral thesis “Cognitive Space in the Interactive Movie Map: An Investigation of Spatial Learning in Virtual Environments”, by Robert Mohl, 1981, submitted at MIT. In a demonstration carried out using images recorded at Aspen, Colo., the viewer is permitted to select film clips taken by a camera that is arranged to simulate driving down a street. At each intersection, the viewer chooses to turn left, turn right, or to proceed straight ahead. The viewer thereby simulates driving around streets in Aspen, Colo.
In other fields, it is known to gather, along with images, information concerning the position of the camera. Governmental and private agencies use satellites and airplanes to record images of positionally referenced data, such as land features or clouds. Each image frame contains positional references to the image tilt or plane of the camera. Present methods commonly either constrain the orientation of the camera to a fixed position, i.e. up and down, or use features captured in the image frames to derive relative positions and orientations of successive images when combining the image frames to form a map or the like.
Devices are known which combine images by matching features common to each of two or more images, i.e. superimposing.
One aspect of the present invention is recording positional data along with images. A number of methods are known whereby one may locate an object and describe the position of an object relative to a positional reference. For example, a magnetic device is known which can determine its position and orientation within a known magnetic field. Satellite systems and radio signal triangulation can also be used to determine position precisely. Inertial position determination systems are also known and are widely used in inertial navigational systems.
An object of this invention is providing an image data gathering device which encodes positional and/or spatial information by capturing both camera position and camera orientation information along with image data. This information permits images to be joined or sequenced for viewing without the distortions that can result from attempting to match the edges of adjoining images together.
A further object of this invention is providing three-dimensional image reconstruction of objects using frames shot from different viewpoints and perspectives through the provision of a triangulation reference.
Still another object of this invention is providing a camera path map which allows images to be selected based upon the position and orientation of the camera from the map. For example, an operator cam learn the location of an object in a film clip, such as an escalator. Images of the escalator may then be quickly and automatically located by selecting other frames which point to that same escalator from different camera positions.
Another object of the invention is providing a compact and practical image and positional data recording system which uses commonly available equipment. A system having accelerometers mounted directly upon the recorder, eliminating the need for a restrained or gimballed platform, permits greater freedom of motion for the recording device as well as reduced cost and complexity.
Briefly described, the invention resides in a video camera that is integrated with a tracking data acquisition unit containing accelerometers and gimbal-mounted gyroscopes, and optionally a rangefinder. As the operator of the video camera moves about taking a motion picture of the environment, a microprocessor and logic associated with the accelerometers and gyroscopes senses all rotational motions of the camera by means of sensors associated with the gimbals and senses all translational motions of the camera by means of sensors associated with the accelerometers. And the rangefinder provides information to the microprocessor and logic concerning the distance from the camera to the subject being photographed.
From data presented by these sensors, the microprocessor and logic compute and generate a modulated audio signal that is encoded with a continuous record of acceleration in the X, Y and Z directions as well as with a continuous record of the pitch, roll, and yaw of the camera and of the distance to the subject. This audio tracking information data signal is recorded on the audio track of the same video tape upon which the video images are being recorded by the camera. In this manner, the video tape recording captures, along with the sequence of images, the tracking data from which the precise position of the camera, its precise orientation, and the position of the subject may later be computed.
Later on, the recorded audio tracking information data and video data is played back into a computer. Images are selected from the sequence of images and are retained, in compressed form, in a database. Each image is then linked to computed positional information that defines, for each image, the location and orientation of the camera and, optionally, the distance to the subject and the subject location. This positional information is derived through computation from the tracking information retrieved from the video tape audio track, as will be explained below.
Next, special computer programs can aid an individual using the computer in navigating through the images, using the positional information to organize the images in ways that make it easy for the user to browse through the images presented on the graphics screen. Several such programs are described below, and a complete description is presented of a movie mapper program which presents the user with a plan view and elevational views of the camera path plotted as a graph alongside views of selected images, with the path marked to show the position and orientation of the camera. The user, by clicking at any point on this path with a computer mouse, may instantly retrieve and view an image captured at the chosen point. Additionally, by clicking upon diamonds and arrows and the like displayed as overlays superimposed upon an image, the user may command the program to search for and find the nearest image which gives a view rotated slightly to the left or right or which maintains the same view but advances forward in the direction of the view or backward. One may also jump forward and turn simultaneously. A wider field of view may be assembled by assembling automatically chosen images and aligning them into a panorama. The user is thus enabled to navigate through the images in the manner of navigating a boat to the extent permitted by the nature and variety of the images in the data base.
Further objects and advantages are apparent in the drawings and in the detailed description which follows.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a rendering of the spatially referenced video camera 100, which includes a tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105, a video camera 120 having a video cassette recorder 130, a demodulation circuit 155, and a personal computer 185.
FIG. 2 is a perspective drawing of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the tracking sensors and the microprocessor based tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 according to the invention in the context of the spatially referenced video camera 100.
FIG. 4 is a data format diagram showing the tracking data acquisition unit output packet format.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the program system modules that represent the major software components of the spatially referenced camera system.
FIG. 6 is a data flow diagram depicting the data flow through the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105.
FIG. 7 is a data flow diagram depicting the tracking and video data flow from playback of the video cassette recorder 130, through the demodulation circuit 155, into the personal computer 185 under the control of the data entry and storage program 305.
FIG. 8 is a data format diagram depicting alternative positional data record formats including the quaternion position notation record format 715 and the direct angular notation format 775.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram of the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310.
FIG. 10 is a more detailed block diagram of the step 10006 in FIG. 9.
FIG. 11 is a more detailed block diagram of the step 1120 in FIG. 10.
FIG. 12 is a more detailed block diagram of the calculate current position step 1214 in FIG. 11.
FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an alternative method for converting tracking data to position data.
FIG. 14 is a more detailed block diagram of the write position record step 1122 in FIG. 10.
FIG. 15 is a block diagram of the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 illustrating in particular its electrical interconnections to the remaining elements of the spatially referenced video camera 100.
FIG. 16 is a block diagram of the programs which control the central processing unit 480 in FIG. 15.
FIG. 17 is an alternate embodiment of the invention illustrating use of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 as a pointing and image retrieval device.
FIG. 18 illustrates the operation of the positional frame retrieval program 330 in which range information is added so that all of the images viewing a selected object 3202 may be located and retrieved, as a group.
FIGS. 19 to 25 and 28 to 31 are computer screen snapshot views of the screens generated by the movie mapper program 325 in operation, including presentations of the captured images, of the path of the camera in plan and elevational views, and of various pop-down menus;
FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating the structure of program-generated objects in the movie mapper program 325 when it is in actual operation.
FIG. 27 is an information flow block diagram of the program-generated objects in the movie mapper program 325 illustrating how they communicate.
FIGS. 32 to 35 are flow chart representations of portions of the movie mapper program 325.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
Referring to the drawings and especially to FIG. 1, a spatially referenced video camera is shown embodying the present invention and generally identified by the numeral 100. The spatially referenced video camera 100 includes a tracking data acquisition unit 105 rigidly attached to a video camera 120 having a built-in video cassette recorder 130. As the spatially referenced video camera 100 is operated, video data from the video camera 120 and tracking data from the tracking data acquisition unit 105 are recorded onto a video cassette within the recorder 130. Once the desired recordings have been made, the information is transferred to a personal computer 185 for processing and display.
FIG. 3 presents a block diagram of the camera 100, illustrating its individual hardware components and bow they are interconnected by signal paths. The tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 contains a data acquisition program 300 (FIG. 16), and the personal computer 185 contains a number of computer programs. All of these programs, and their data flow relationships, are shown in FIG. 5 which illustrates the camera 100's software components in overview.
With reference to FIG. 5, the video data gathered by the video camera 120 and the position and orientation data gathered by the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 (under the control of the microcontroller data acquisition program 300) are first stored on videotape. Later, they are fed into the personal computer 185. The two data streams are captured by the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 and are stored, respectively, in a tracking database 324 and in a video database 323.
Once safely stored within the personal computer 185, the tracking database 324 is reprocessed into a positional database 322 by a tracking database to positional database conversion program 310. Now the image retrieval programs 325, 330, and 335 may be called upon to search through the positional database 322, to retrieve images from the video database 323 based upon camera location, camera orientation, and even object location, and to display the images upon the face of the computer 185.
Tracing the data flow through the system components at a more detailed level will explain the functionality of the preferred embodiment of the spatially referenced camera.
First, the video camera 120 (FIG. 1) produces a standard video signal that is recorded on the video track of a video cassette by the camera's video cassette recorder 130. Referring to FIG. 2, the tracking data acquisition unit 105 contains three orthogonally positioned translational accelerometers 435, 440, and 445; two orthogonally arranged gyroscopes 400 and 410; and a laser rangefinder 485. All six of these sensors are rigidly mounted to an inertial platform 415. Referring to FIG. 3, a control circuit 470 polls the output signals of these sensors and assembles tracking data frames 535 (FIG. 4) which describe the instantaneous, real time orientation and translation acceleration experienced by the spatially referenced video camera 100. A serial bit stream comprised of these tracking data frames is modulated to produce an audio line level modulated tracking data signal 115 which is fed into the audio input 125 of the video cassette recorder 130 and recorded on the audio track of the video cassette alongside the corresponding video information.
Second, the completed recording, stored on the video cassette, is played back to the personal computer 185 on any standard video cassette player or directly from the camera 120 (FIG. 1). The tracking data is demodulated by a demodulator circuit 155 and is input to the personal computer 185 through a standard serial I/O serial port 175. Simultaneously, the video data is input to the personal computer 185 via a video digitizer input 180. Referring to FIG. 5, a data entry and storage program 305 stores the tracking and video data on the personal computer's disk operating system 320 in a tracking database 324 and in a video database 323. A second program 310 converts the tracking database 324 into a positional database 322.
Third, the set of three display programs 325, 330, and 335 allow a user to view and select video frames based on the relative position or absolute orientation of the camera.
Tracing the data flow through the individual parts of the spatially referenced video camera 100 at the most detailed level discloses how to build the preferred embodiment of the invention.
Referring to FIG. 3, the tracking data acquisition unit 105 continuously measures the translational acceleration and rotational orientation experienced by the spatially referenced video camera 100. To achieve the most accurate measurement of translational acceleration, three accelerometers 435, 440 and 445, such as SUNDSTRAND Model QA-700, are positioned orthogonal to each other and are mounted on a stable inertial platform 415. The accelerometers measure acceleration in each of three dimensions: accelerometer 435 measures acceleration in the X direction, accelerometer 445 measures acceleration in the Y direction, accelerometer 440 measures acceleration in the Z direction. Each accelerometer outputs a voltage signal with an amplitude proportional to the acceleration detected. A multichannel analog to digital converter 465, such as ANALOG DEVICES Model AD7716, receives each accelerometer's output and generates a 24-bit numerical representation of the acceleration experienced in each direction.
Two gyroscopes, such as GYRATION Model GE9100A, a vertical gyroscope 400 and a directional gyroscope 410 are also orthogonally mounted on the stable inertial platform 415 relative to each other. The vertical gyroscope 400, aligned along the X or Y axis, measures yaw (rotation about the Z axis), while the directional gyroscope 410, aligned along the Z axis, measures both roll (rotation about the Y axis) and pitch (rotation about the X axis). (The Y axis is assumed to point in the direction of the camera.) The gyroscopes are dual gimballed electronic components that generate a pair of square wave signals which are locked out of phase with respect to each other. The sequence of the rising and falling edges of the square waves relative to each other indicates the angular rotation about the gyroscope's measurement axis experienced by the spatially referenced camera 100. Quadrature decoders 450, 455, 460, such as HEWLETT PACKARD Model HCTL2020, receive the three paired square wave signal outputs of the gyroscopes 400, 410; and for each signal pair, they count the relative sequence of rising and falling edges between the two square wave signals to generate a 16-bit numerical representation of the rotation experienced about each axis. An interrupt is generated following any change in these signals. This interrupt causes a central processing unit 480 (FIG. 15) within the tracking data acquisition unit 105 to capture the new status of the counts within the decoders 450, 455, and 460.
The inertial platform 415 (FIG. 2) is connected to a post 425 that is threaded at one end 430 such that the entire data acquisition unit 105 can be rigidly attached to the tripod mounting hardware of a standard camcorder 120.
In addition to the accelerometers and the gyroscopes there is a control circuit 470 (FIGS. 2, 3, and 15) mounted to the bottom of the inertial platform 415 (see FIG. 2). This microcontroller based circuit (Z-WORLD SMARTBLOCK Model SB-DEV-32) polls the quadrature decoders 450, 455, 460 and the analog to digital converter 465 in sequence. Referring to FIGS. 4 and 6, the respective data packets 500, 505, and 520 from each sensor and a frame identification pattern (530 or 550) are compiled to form the tracking data frame 535 (or 540) as the first step 600 (FIG. 6) in the data flow through the spatially referenced video camera 100. In the next few steps, 605, 610, 615, and 620, the data frame resulting from the first step 600 is broken into 4-bit nibbles which are encased within message byte having a “1” start bit and three “0” stop bits, as in “1XXXX000” where “XXXX” is the 4 bits of data. The message bytes are then subjected to encoding (HARRIS Model HD-6409). The control circuit transmits a continuous stream of the tracking data frames to a modulator circuit 475 (FIGS. 3 and 15) that modulates the data on to an audio line level signal. The inertial platform 415, the circuitry 420, the gyroscopes 400, 410 and the accelerometers 435, 440, 445 are all contained within a case 107 (FIG. 1). The single output 110 from the case 107 produces an audio signal 115 containing the encoded bit stream of acceleration and orientation data. The output of the tracking data acquisition control circuit 470 is thus recorded to video tape alongside the corresponding video data signal from the video camera 120.
The spatially referenced camera 100 can be configured and used with a laser rangefinder 485 (FIG. 2), such as an Acuity Research Inc. ACCURANGE Model 3000 in addition to the video camera 120. In this configuration, the instantaneous distance between the spatially referenced camera 100 and a pinpointed location on the surface of an object that is being recorded is also captured and stored as a binary numerical representation of distance along with tracking data from the other sensors. As shown in FIG. 4 at 540, range data derived from the rangefinder 485 is appended to the data frame and recorded to video tape alongside the corresponding video data signal from the video camera 120. (If the camera 120 is of an “autofocus” design, it may be possible to derive a range signal from the camera's autofocus mechanism.)
The rangefinder 485 (FIG. 2) is rigidly mounted to the inertial platform 415 and generates a continuous serial data output signal containing two alternating values. The rangefinder 485 output signal RXA1 is directly input to the tracking data acquisition unit control circuit 470 as a serial data signal. The first value contained in the signal output by the rangefinder 485 is a 24 bit numerical representation of the distance between the precise spot on the surface of the object being recorded and the spatially referenced camera 100. The second value is an 8 bit gray scale value that indicates the reflectivity of the object's surface at the measured location. In this configuration, the control circuit 470 is configured to be interrupted by a signal from the quadrature decoders 450, 455, & 460 whenever there is a change in the inertial platform's orientation detected by the gyroscopes 400 and 410. Upon detecting an interrupt signal, the control circuit reads the range and reflectivity values presented serially by the rangefinder 485. In this alternative configuration, a range data packet 520 (FIG. 4) is compiled along with the accelerometer data packets 500 and the gyroscope data packets 505 to form the tracking data frame with range data as indicated at 540 in FIG. 4.
Referring to FIG. 4, the tracking data frame format 535 output by the tracking data acquisition unit 105 is essentially comprised of two or three different kinds of packets: acceleration packets 500, gyroscopic packets 505 and optionally, range packets 510. An acceleration packet 500 is a 24 bit value that represents the magnitude of an acceleration vector in the X, Y or Z direction. A gyroscopic packet 505 is a 16 bit value that represents degree of pitch, roil or yaw. A range packet 520 is a 24 bit value plus an eight bit value. The 24 bit value 510 represents a range distance and the eight bit number 515 represents relative surface reflectivity in terms of a gray scale value.
The format of a complete data frame 535 (without range information) is composed of a frame identification pattern 530, which is formed from three repetitions of the 16 bit value 017F hex (at 525). This is followed by data: a 24-bit acceleration value in the X direction 500A, a 16-bit pitch value 505A, a 24-bit acceleration value in the v direction 500B, a 16-bit roll value 505B, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Z direction 500C, and a 16-bit yaw value 505C. The tracking data frame format with range information included 540 starts with a frame identification pattern 550 composed of three repetitions of the value 037F hex (at 545), followed by a 24-bit acceleration value in the X direction 500A, an 8-bit delta (or incremental change) pitch value 505A, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Y direction 500B, an 8-bit delta roll value 505B, a 24-bit acceleration value in the Z direction 500C, an 8-bit delta yaw value 505C, and finally the range data 555 and a gray scale reflectivity value 560. The records 540 containing range information are generated whenever an interrupt from the decoders 450, 455, and 460 indicates that the camera orientation has changed.
Once the video tape is filled with modulated tracking and video data, it is played back. The video output is directly connected to a conventional video digitizer input 180, such as the INTEL SMART VIDEO RECORDER, that is inserted into the ISA, EISA, VESA, PCI, or other accessory port or slot of the personal computer 185. As the video cassette is played back on the video cassette player 130, the video digitizer input 180 captures the video frames of the recorded images and passes digitized video frame data on to the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 shown in FIG. 7. The audio output of the video cassette recorder 135 is fed into a demodulator circuit 155 which converts the modulated tracking data signal back into a serial bit-stream of tracking data. The demodulation output 165 is connected to a conventional serial data input port 175 of the personal computer 185. As the video cassette is played back on the video cassette recorder 130, the demodulation circuit 155 converts the modulated tracking data signal into an RS-232 serial data signal which is read into the personal computer 185 by the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 through the serial port 175.
FIG. 7 shows the tracking and video data entry and storage program 305 data flow diagram. The modulated tracking data signal 145 from the audio output 135 of the video cassette recorder 130 or is fed into the demodulator 155, where the audio signal is demodulated into a serial bit stream (step 640). The output of this process flows into a manchester decoder (step 645). Every other nibble following an initial leading one of the decoded bit stream is then serially transmitted by the demodulator circuit 155 to the personal computer's serial port 175 (step 650). In the next step 655, the personal computer receives the bit stream and encodes each nibble as a ASCII hex digit 655. The ASCII digits are then assembled into lines of tracking data 660.
Simultaneously, the video signal 150 from the video output 140 of the video cassette recorder 130 is captured (step 680), and video frames are selected (step 685). Frame numbers are assigned to the selected video frames (step 690), and at step 665 these frame numbers are concatenated to the lines of tracking data to form tracking data lines. Finally, at step 675 a database of numbered tracking data lines is created and is stored on the disk in a database file called the tracking database 324.
At step 695, the video frame is fed into a video compression program, and the outputted compressed video frame is concatenated or otherwise linked to the same video frame number at 695. Finally, at step 700, a database of numbered and compressed video frames is created and is stored on the disk in a file that is called the video database 323.
The tracking and video data entry and storage program 305, residing on the personal computer 185, essentially builds two related databases. The first is a tracking database 324 composed of enumerated records containing the orientation, the translational acceleration, and optionally the range data originally generated by the tracking data acquisition unit 105. The second is a video database 323 composed of enumerated records containing digitized and compressed images of video frames captured from the video tape originally generated by the video camera 120.
Once all of the recorded tracking and video data are stored, the personal computer 185 converts the tracking database 324 into a positional database 322 via a software module called the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310 (FIGS. 5 and 9).
In the preferred embodiment, an existing image capture computer program is adapted for use to capture, compress, and store selected images in the video database 323, as indicated in steps 680, 685, 690, 695, and 700 of FIG. 7. This is a conventional program for video capture that can capture and store a video image every 1/10th or 1/20th of a second or so (whatever the human user of the system specifies). This program is also capable of linking to and calling as a subroutine a separate program which performs the steps 655, 660, 665, 670, and 675 in FIG. 7 every 1/10th or 1/20th of a second, passing to this separate program the index value into the video database 323 that can later be used to find and retrieve the most recently captured image. This index value is stored in the tracking database 324 along with the associated tracking data extracted from the signal 170.
To implement the step 655, the computer 185 is equipped with a conventional, serial port interrupt driven program that is called upon automatically, whenever the serial input port 176 receives a serial byte of the tracking data signal 170, to retrieve the byte from the serial port UART and to store the byte in some form of circular buffer in RAM from which the bytes may be readily retrieved.
Each time the step 660 is performed (every 1/10th or 1/20th of a second or so), all the bytes currently in this circular buffer are retrieved, combined with historical data, and separated from any partial data frame that is retained as historical data. In this manner, several data frames in the format illustrated at 535 or 540 in FIG. 4 are retrieved from the circular buffer, combined with the current image retrieval index supplied by the image capture computer program, and stored in the tracking database 324 (FIG. 5). Note that even though not all of the video image frames are normally retained, every piece of tracking data information must be retained so that the position and orientation of the inertial platform can be computed by a “dead reckoning” process. Accordingly, the same video image number is typically combined with several sets of tracking data information.
FIG. 5 illustrates the creation of the positional database. Numbered tracking data frames from the tracking database 324 are input to the program 310 which, using well known principles of Newtonian mechanics, converts the tracking data lines into positional data records. The positional data records are stored to the disk in a database file called the positional database 322. The format of the positional data records is dependent upon the method of conversion used in the conversion program 310. As shown in FIG. 8, there are two possible formats for the equivalent positional data. The quaternion position notation record format is composed of position number 720, video frame number 730, X displacement from the origin 735, Y displacement from the origin 740, Z displacement from the origin 745, and a unit vector defined by an X component 755, a Y component 760, a Z component 770 and a twist component 750. This data completely defines the position and orientation of the spatially referenced video camera 100 with respect to the point of origin. The other equivalent format is the direct angular notation representation. It is composed of the position number 720, video frame number 730, X displacement from the origin 735, Y displacement from the origin 740, Z displacement from the origin 745, and angular coordinates Rx 780, Ry 785 and Rz 790. These numeric values are separated by space characters 725, as shown.
The details of the tracking database to positional database conversion programs 310 are shown in FIG. 9.
The program 310 begins at 1002 by initializing the variables. Then at 1004, it opens the input tracking data file 324 (FIG. 5), the output position file 322 (FIG. 5), and an alterative output position file (not shown—this alternative file has the orientation represented in quaternion form, rather than as yaw, pitch, and roll values). At 1006, the data is retrieved, processed, and placed in the output file.
The data processing steps 1006 are described in FIG. 10.
The program steps 1006 control the reading of the input file and enforce the formatting of the output file. In particular, these steps buffer the position records in such a manner that each record processed is complete even though the input records may have been broken up, as described above. In this manner, the program generates one and only one output position record for each frame.
The program begins at 1110 by reading in a data frame. At 1114, if there are no more frames, then at 1130 the files are closed and we are done. If a frame is found, a data record is retrieved from the frame at 1112. At 1118, if a record is found, it is processed at 1120 and written out to the positional database 322 at step 1122. Whether or not a record is found, program control continues at step 1124 where any unprocessed residual data is prepared (or added to) the next frame. Program control then returns to 1110 where the next frame is read.
The data record processing routine 1120 is described in FIG. 11. First at 1210, a record is read and is corrected for gyro counter overflow. Since the pitch, roll, and yaw numbers are 16 -bit numbers that increase continuously if the camera rotates, they will occasionally overflow to zero. These numbers are thus converted into a 32 bit numeric format that never overflows.
Next, the acceleration values are converted into a floating point form at step 1212. Gain and offset errors can be corrected in this step. This routine also computes the magnitude of the acceleration as the square root of the sum of the squares of the three components.
Step 1214 calculates the current position from the acceleration data. With reference to FIG. 12, first we test the magnitude to see if it is close to the gravitational constant (step 1310). If so, and if this is the first time that this condition has been met (step 1312), then the current yaw reading is saved as the zero directional reference for the data. In any case, at 1316, the gravity acceleration vector is used as a vertical reference for the purpose of determining how tilted the camera platform is. Valves of pitch and roll, P0 and RV, are computed which, when applied to the camera's present pitch and roll, give a level reference platform. The program that performs this calculation is set forth below.
In the following short program, the values of acceleration are “ac->p.f” for the y value of acceleration and “ac->p.l” for the X value of acceleration (the z value is not needed). This program computes PØ and RØ, and it acquires the initial yaw value as WØ.
// acquire reference for pitch and roll gyros. Used to
// correct for G later
void GetRollPitchZero (PositionAttitudeRecord * ac,
long double magnitude)
{
long double xmag, ymag, numAvg;
xmag=ac—>p.f/magnitude;
ymag=ac—>p.l/magnitude;
numAvg=GO; // for backward average of all samples
// numAvg=1; // for no averaging
rref = −asinl (ymag):
pref = asinl (xmag);
// average over all samples, equal weights for all
p0 = ((p0 * (numAvg−1)) + (deg(pref)+ac—>a.p))/numAvg;
r0 = ((r0 * (numAvg−1)) + (deg(rref)+ac—>a.r))/numAvg;
if (GO == 1) // this one is the first
{
w0 = ac—>a.w; // init to current yaw count
}
}
Acquisition of rØ and pØ values allows the definition of a reference frame for integration in which the transformed X and Y acceleration components have no contribution from the gravitational force. X and Y in the reference frame are perpendicular to the direction of the gravity vector, while Z in the reference frame is parallel to the gravity vector.
GetRollPitchZero also averages PØ and RØ readings on all subsequent calls after the first call to achieve better and better estimates for these values.
At step 1320, since the only acceleration is that of gravity, we assume that the camera is motionless, and we arbitrarily set the velocity values in all three directions to zero. This assumption holds because the camera is hand-held and is never stable when the human carrier is in motion. If the camera were mounted upon some conveyance that can move very smoothly at a uniform velocity, then this assumption would not hold, and some additional data indicating the velocity of the camera would have to be recorded. In an airplane or automobile, for example, the speedometer reading or ground speed reading could be recorded to assume that this algorithm functions properly.
Next, at step 1318, the current pitch, yaw, and roll are transformed into coordinates that indicate these parameters relative to the newly-defined reference frame. This step 1318 is always performed regardless of whether the magnitude of the acceleration matches that of gravity.
To facilitate, the following computations, the yaw, pitch, and roll values, which are presently referenced to a horizontal plane, must be converted into what is called the quaternion form. This is a four dimensional vector with three imaginary components and one real component. This is done to facilitate the transformation of the acceleration values, which are presently referenced to the tilted camera plane, into valves referenced to the horizontal reference plane (just defined, preparatory to integrating the acceleration values to produce velocity and displacement values.
This calculation is performed by the following program. In this program, the input variable is a record “AttitudeRecord” which contains yaw “w”, pitch “p”, and roll “r”. The returned quaternion values are “s”, “i”, “j”, and “k”, where “s” is the real value and the others are the imaginary values.
// convert yaw,pitch,roll to quaternion form
void AttitudeQuaternion (AttitudeRecord * p,
QuaternionRecord * qcos)
{
long double cw,cp,cr,sw,sp,sr; /* sine and cosine */
long double rp, rw, rr;
long double trace, c[3][3];
rw=rad(p—>w):
rp=rad(p—>p);
rr=rad(p—>r):
cw=cosl (rw):
cp=cosl (rp);
cr=cosl (rr):
sw=sinl (rw);
sp=sinl (rp);
sr=sinl (rr);
// use cosine matrix form for calculation
c[0][0]=cw*cp; c[0][1]=sw*cp; c[0][2]=−sp;
c[1][0]=(−cr*sw) + (sr*sp*cw); c[1][1]=(cr*cw)*(sr*sp*sw);
c[1][2]=sr*cp;
c[2][0]=(sr*sw) + (cr*sp*cw); c[2][1]=(−sr*cw)+(cr*sp*sw);
c[2][2]=cr*cp;
trace=c[0][0] + c[1][1] + c[2][2];
qcos—>s=sqrt1(1+trace)/2.;
qcos—>i=(c[1][2] − c[2][1])/(4.* qcos—>s);
qcos—>j=(c[2][0] − c[0][2])/(4.* qcos—>s);
qcos—>k=(c[0][1] − c[1][0])/(4.* qcos—>s);
At step 1324, the acceleration vector is transformed from the camera body coordinate frame into the stable reference frame.
  • //rotate accel vector to platform coordinates
  • //using inverse quaternion
  • posqInverse.q.s=posqFwd.q.s;
  • posqInverse.q.i=−posqFwd.q.i;
  • posqInverse.q.j=−posqFwd.q.j;
  • posqInverse.q.k=−posqFwd.q.k;
  • QuaternionRotate (&pos->p,&posqInverse.q,&prec);
    In the above, the acceleration vector is represented by a three component vector “&pos->p”. The four element quaternion value (computed above) is “posqFwd.q.s”, “-.i”, “-.j”, and “-.k”. In the above routine, this quaternion value is first inverted, giving “posqInverse.q.s.”, etc. Next, this inverted quaternion and the acceleration vector are passed to the “QuaternionRotate” routine which returns the transformed acceleration values in a vector “&prec”.
At step 1326, the integration of the transformed acceleration values is carried out as follows:
    • dx+=(prec.l)/G;
    • dz+=(prec.u)/G;
    • dy+=(prec.f)/G;
    • x+=dx;
    • y+=dy;
    • z+=dz.
      In the above routine, “dx”, “dy”, and “dz” are the velocity values in the x, y, and z directions. “x”, “y”, and “z” are the distance values. The incoming acceleration values are “prec.l” for the “x” axis acceleration, “prec.f” for the “y” axis acceleration, and “prec.u” for the “z” axis acceleration. Note that the acceleration values are normalized with respect to the value of gravity.
The quaternion coordinate transformation process is carried out by using two cross multiplications, and is illustrated below:
//returns rotated vector in rp
void QuaternionRotate (positionRecord *v,
QuaternionRecord *q.
PositionRecord *rp)
{
QuaternionRecord vq,qi.rq;
// quaternion multiplication qi v q
// from the book.
// qi is −i −j −k...
vq.s=0; vq.i=v—>f: vq.j=v—>l; vq.k=v—>u;
qi.s=q—>s;
qi.i=−q—>i;
qi.j=−q—>j;
qi.k=−q—>k;
QuaternionMultiply (&qi, &vq, &rq);
QuaternionMultiply (&rq, q, &vq); //reissue vq
rp—>f=vq.i;
rp—>l=vq.j;
rp—>u=vq.k.

The incoming arguments to this function are a three-dimensional vector “v” that is to be rotated and a four-dimensional quaternion vector “q” that defines the rotation. The three-dimensional vector “v” is first transformed into a four-dimensional vector “vq” with the fourth component “vq.s” set to zero.
First, an inverse “qi” is formed of the quaternion “q”. Next, the incoming vector “vq” is quaternion multiplied by the inverse quaternion vector “qi;”. The result of this multiplication “rq” is then quaternion multiplied by the quaternion vector “qi” Three components of the resulting vector, which is returned as “vq”, are transferred back into the vector “rp” which is returned as the transformed result.
The quaternion multiplication is defined by the following program: void QuaternionMultiply (QuaternionRecord *q,
    • QuaternionRecord *s,
    • QuaternionRecord *r)
{
 r—>s=(q—>s*s—>s)−(q—>i*s—>i)−(q—>j*s—>j )−(q—>k*s—>k);
 r—>i=(q—>s*s—>i)+(q—>i*s—>s)+(q—>j*s—>k)−(q—>k*s—>j );
 r—>j=(q—>s*s—>j)−(q—>i*s—>k)+(q—>j*s—>s)+(q—>k*s—>i);
 r—>k=(q—>s*s—>k)+(q—>i*s—>j)−(q—>j*s—>i)+(q—>k*s—>s).
}
The details of the step 1122 in FIG. 10 relating to the writing out of a record 775 (FIG. 8) are set forth in FIG. 14. At step 1402, if any frame numbers were skipped, at step 1122 a position record is generated and saved for each such skipped frame. Since there are more acceleration records than there are video frames, step 1408 tests to see if the current frame number has already been written out as a position record. If not, then a new position record 775 is written out at step 1410 along with the frame number. In any case, at step 1412, the position record is saved for possible future use if any frames were skipped (at step 1402 during a future iteration).
In addition to writing out the records 775 (FIG. 8) into the positional database 322 having the file name extension “*.TLA”, the preferred embodiment of the invention simultaneously writes out records of the type 715 (FIG. 8) into a separate positional database (not shown) having the file name extension “*.TEL”. In this manner, two positional databases are created, one specifying camera attitude using the direct angular notation format, and the other specifying camera attitude using the quaternion notation format.
An alternative method of position estimation using the inertial platform is now described. The accelerometer inputs described above as the vector “pos” in the program “acc2pos.c” is replaced by a vector of constant velocity as shown in this program fragment:
if (magnitude < G + DELTA_MAG//+DELTA
  && magnitude > G − DELTA_MAG//−DELTA
  )
{
// for velocity estimation method
// dx = dy = dz = 0;
pos—>p.f=0;
}
else
{
pos—>p.f=500; // assume motion is in direction
    // camera is pointing
}
pos—>p.l=0; pos—>p.u=0;

This sets the velocity vector to one of two values, depending upon the magnitude of instantaneous acceleration being experienced. The vector component “pos->p.f” is the component pointing in the direction of the camera.
If the magnitude is below the threshold G+ or −DELTA_MAG (the force of gravity plus or minus a small deviation, determined by empirical measurement), the camera is assumed to be at rest. If the magnitude is outside this range the velocity is set to be the average velocity of a person walking. The camera is pointed in the direction the operator is walking whenever the operator moves, and this velocity vector is transformed using, the same quaternion as the acceleration measurement above.
The velocity vector is rotated in the following code fragment:
    • QuaternionRotate(&pos->p.&posqInverse.q.&prec);
The position is then calculated by summing each resultant component:
    • x−=prec.l;
    • y+=prec.f;
    • z+=prec.u;
The full text of the alternative “acc2pos.c” file is given in Appendix F. This file is to be substituted for the “acc2pos.c” file listed in Appendix B.
FIG. 13 shows the flow diagram for the alternate position calculation method. FIG. 13 is to be substituted for FIG. 12 in the program flow described above. In particular, the box in FIG. 12 labeled 1324 is replaced by a box 3380, and the box labeled 1326 is replaced by a box 3390.
In FIG. 13 box 3340 the absolute value of acceleration magnitude is compared to that of gravity plus a constant value. If the absolute value of the difference of these quantities is greater than zero, movement is indicated. The forward velocity component pos->p.f is then set to a velocity value of “walking speed” in box 3350. Otherwise forward component is set to 0 in box 3360. In either case the left-right and up-down components are set to 0 in box 3370.
The velocity estimate is then transformed from platform coordinates to reference coordinates in box 3380. The resulting transformed velocity is summed component-wise to produce the position estimate in box 3390.
These boxes in FIG. 13 are identical to their counterparts in FIG. 12:
FIG. 13 box 3310 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1310.
FIG. 13 box 3312 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1312.
FIG. 13 box 3314 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1314.
FIG. 13 box 3322 is identical to FIG. 12 box 1322.
Referring now to FIG. 15, the hardwire circuitry portions of the invention are shown in block diagram form. FIG. 15 sets forth all of the significant signal interconnections between the circuitry blocks.
As shown in FIG. 15, the heart of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 is a control circuit 470 which contains a central processing unit 480. This central processing unit, in the preferred embodiment, is a Z-WORLD SMART BLOCK, Model SB-DEV-32, programmable computer.
In FIG. 15, the central processing unit 480 provides addressing signals 1502, data signals 1504, and control signals 1506 to a control logic 490. The control logic 490 contains two programmable logic units PALS which respond to the signal from the CPU by generating all of the various control signals that are needed to run the tracking data acquisition unit 105.
The rangefinder 485 is shown connected to the CPU 480 by means of two serial communication lines, an outgoing serial communication line TXA1 carrying commands from the CPU 480 to the rangefinder 485, and a return serial communication line RXA1 carrying serial information from the rangefinder 485 back to the CPU 480. The rangefinder 485 returns gathered information periodically, at its own rate of speed. The CPU 480 formulates a range packet 520 (FIG. 4) containing a 24 byte range value 510 and an 8 byte gray scale value 515, and adds it to the telemetry stream of data.
The two gyroscopes, the directional gyroscope 400 and the vertical gyroscope 410, are designed so that when they are deprived of power, they return to rest positions with the vertical gyroscope 410 having its axis vertically disposed and with the directional gyroscope 400 having axis horizontally disposed.
When the camera 100 is placed into operation, the central processing unit 480 causes the control logic 490 to generate a GYRON signal and to feed it to a gyroscope regulated power supply 420. In response, the gyroscope power supply 420 generates a plus 10 volt, regulated +GYRO signal which feeds power to both of the gyroscopes 400 and 410. In response, the gyroscope motors begin to spin so their axis are stabilized and so that the gimbals associated with the gyroscopes begin to generate pairs of quadrature modulated signals indicating the rotational motions of the tracking data acquisition unit 105.
The directional gyroscope 400 generates two square wave signals in quadrature as the platform 415 is rotated about a vertical axis to the left or to the right. These quadrature signals, which may be called collectively the yaw signal, appear on the two wires DOA and DOB. These signals arise from sensors associated with the gimbals within the gyroscope 400 in response to rotation of the gimbals.
The vertical gyroscope 410 is similarly equipped with two sets of sensors associated with its gimbals to generate pitch and roll quadrature modulated signals. The pitch signal, which appears on the two wires V1A and V1B, indicates the rate at which the camera 100 is pointing more upwards towards the ceiling or more downwards towards the floor. The roll, signal which appears on two wires V0A and V0B, indicates the rate at which the camera is tilting to one side or to the other, away from or towards the vertical.
These quadrature modulated pairs of signals require brief explanation. Assume for the moment that the camera is being rotated horizontally from left to right. This will cause a yaw signal to appear on the two wires D0A and D0B. Each wire bears a square wave signal, and the square waves are at quadrature with each other. This means that a negative going transition of the first of the square wave signals is followed by a negative going transition of the second of the square wave signals. Likewise, a positive going transition of the first signal is always followed by a positive going transition of the second signal. The speed of these transitions indicates the speed with which the camera is being rotated from left to right. If the camera motion stops, then the signals remain stationary until camera motion proceeds once again.
If the direction of rotation is reversed, then again square wave signals are generated—but this time in the opposite phase of quadrature. Thus, if a left-to-right motion causes a first signal to make its transitions ahead of the second signal, then a right-to-left motion will cause the second signal to make its transitions ahead of the first signal. This is identical to the way in which the motion signals work in a mouse pointing device of the type commonly used with digital computers.
The pitch and roll signals, represented respectively by the V1A-V1B and by the V0A-V0B signal lines, operate in a manner identical to the yaw signal just described, with the information being conveyed by quadrature modulated square waves. The three pairs of quadrature modulated signals V1A, V1B, V0A, V0B, and D0A, D1B are fed into respective quadrature decoders 450, 455 and 460. The quadrature decoders 450, 455 and 460 are conventional models, in this case Hewlett Packard Model No. HCTL 2020. The three accelerometers 435, 440, and 445 are shown each generating an analog accelerometer output signal SIG0, SIG1, and SIG2 and also a temperature signal TEMP0, TEMP1, and TEMP2. These signals flow into the multiplexer and A-to-D converter 465.
In the manner described above, the central processing unit 480 is enabled to obtain data indicating the distance of the subject from the rangefinder 485; it is enabled to obtain pitch, roll, and yaw data values from the vertical and directional gyroscopes 400 and 410: and it is enabled to obtain data defining the instantaneous acceleration of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 from the accelerometers 435, 440 and 445 in all three coordinate directions. The CPU 480 continuously packages this information, as explained in steps 600 to 615 in FIG. 6, into the frame data format that is illustrated at 535 or 550 in FIG. 4. This frame data format information is presented in parallel, one byte at a time, over the data bus D0-D6 to shift register and encoder 475.
The shift register and encoder 475 converts the signal into a modulated serial tracking data signal which is presented over the audio data line 115 to the audio record input 125 of the VCR 130.
To summarize the operation of the tracking data acquisition unit 105 as shown in FIG. 15, the central processing until retrieves from the rangefinder 485 in serial form an 8 bit gray scale value 515 and a 24 bit range value 510, as shown in 520 in FIG. 4. It retrieves from the quadrature decoders 450, 455, and 460 associated with the directional and vertical gyroscopes 400 and 410 16 bit data values representing the current pitch, roll, and yaw as stored within counters within the quadrature decoders 450, 455 and 460. It retrieves from the X, Y, and Z accelerometers 435, 445, and 440, 24-bit values representing the current instantaneous acceleration to which the tracking and data acquisition unit 105 is being subjected.
It then combines all of this information into a packet, with each byte in the packet containing a “1” start bit, a nibble of data, and three trailing “0” stop bits, with a 3 byte header 530 and 550 such as those shown at 535 or 540 in FIG. 4. Each packet thus begins with the frame ID pattern elements shown at 525 or 545 as three bytes of information. This is followed by the X acceleration data 500A, the pitch data 505A, the Y acceleration data 500B, the roll data 505B, the Z acceleration data 500C, the yaw data 505C, the range data 555, and the gray scale data 560, as shown in FIG. 4. This information is sent through to the shift register and encoder 475 and appears as a modulated tracking data signal on the audio line 115 which is then recorded by the VCR 130 along with the images flowing from the video camera 120.
Upon playback, the video signal 150 flows directly into the personal computer 185. The modulated tracking data signal 145 flows to a demodulator 155. Following demodulation, the unmodulated tracking data signal flows over a signal line 170 to the PC 185.
FIG. 16 presents a block diagram view of the three programs that control the operation of the central processing unit 480 shown in FIG. 15. Two of these programs 2402 and 2404 are interrupt driven, and the third program 2406 either runs continuously, or it is called into operation periodically by a timer triggered interrupt or other similar mechanism.
The program 2406 begins at 2408 by initializing the system. Initialization includes such steps as turning on the power supply 420 for the gyroscopes, programming and initializing the three quadrature decoders 450, 455, and 460, and setting up the analog to digital converter (within the block 465 in FIG. 15).
Next, at 2050, data is gathered from the rangefinder 485. At 2052, the analog to digital converter is commanded to gather from the accelerometers 435, 445, and 440 the current acceleration of the tracking data acquisition unit 105.
At step 2054, the above data, together with previously stored values of yaw, roll, and pitch are combined into a data packet, with 4 bits of data per byte, as has been explained above ( steps 600, 605, 610, and 615 in FIG. 6; and see the data formats presented in FIG. 4).
At step 2056, the resulting data packet is placed into RAM memory as a series of bytes to await transmission to the shift register and encoder 475.
At step 2058, the interrupt driven program 2402 is placed into service to transmit the bytes of data to the shift register and encoder 475.
At step 2060, the program 2406 tests to see if all of the data bytes have been transmitted. Alternatively, the program simply suspends itself until a fixed time interval has expired. In either case, after transmission is completed or after the expiration of the time interval, program control recommences with step 2050.
The program 2406 thus continuously operates to assemble data packets and to transmit them to the shift register and encoder 475 where the data is modulated onto an audio signal suitable for recordation on the audio soundtrack of a VCR.
The program 2402 is an interrupt driven program placed into operation by the interrupt signal INT1 every time the shift register and encoder 475 successfully transmits a byte of information. At 2062, this program simply sends a data byte from RAM to the shift register and encoder 475 until there are no more data bytes that remain to be transmitted. This interrupt driven routine frees up the program 2406 from the time consuming task of continuously monitoring for when to transmit the next byte of data.
The program 2404 is also an interrupt driven program. It is placed into operation every time one of the three quadrature decoders receives a signal fluctuation from one of the gyroscopes. In response to INT2, this program gathers pitch, roll, and yaw values from the two gyroscopes and stores them in RAM for later transmission at step 2064.
Three display programs are available for viewing the information stored in the positional database.
The spatial database program 335 (FIG. 5) is controlled by a three-dimensional navigation tool, such as the SUN COM FLIGHT MAX JOY STICK, or any three-dimensional, commercially available game control device. Each frame is displayed, and the user is asked whether he wants to select it. A database of frames selected for display is created. For each frame, a two-dimensional rectangle of fixed size is drawn using the WORLD TOOL KIT in a perspective view of three-dimensional space. The rectangle is displayed in the simulation space in the orientation specified by the attitude of the camera positional frame record that corresponds to the video frame. The rectangle is then textured with the video frame so the frames appear to float in space before the user.
The movie mapper program 325 is described in detail below.
The positional frame retrieval program 330 allows the user to identify a region in space on the camera path using the WORLD TOOLKIT. The program defines a rectangular solid in space about each imaged object. The location of each item imaged is computed from the data in each record. All the image records where the location of the item image falls outside of the rectangular solid for an item are discarded, and all remaining records are displayed as a movie view of the item from different perspectives. In essence, all available frames showing the item or the volume indicated are displayed sequentially, giving all the views available of the desired item or volume.
The data tracking and acquisition unit and modulator 105 has illustratively been shown connected to a rangefinder, receiving therefrom a serial data signal which is conveyed to the central computer for possible use in a data retrieval system. The positional frame retrieval program 330 uses this range data to determine the position of imaged objects and to retrieve all images containing a designated object, as contrasted with the movie mapper program technique of retrieving images based upon camera position and orientation (described below).
For example, in FIG. 18, an object 3202 is shown within a camera path 3204 along which the camera orientation at the moment of image capture is indicated by vectors 3206. In FIG. 18, the vectors shown connected by dotted lines 3208 to the object 3202 represent the capture of an image of the object 3202. Range information is also captured indicating how far the object 3202 is from the camera at each of these points.
The range data is preserved in the positional database 322 for this embodiment of the invention. Accordingly, the retrieval program 330, in response to a mouse click at the position of the object, may locate all records 775 which, from position, camera angle, and distance to subject, relate to images of that object. These may be grouped into an object database and displayed as a video movie, as described above.
In addition to a rangefinder, other devices may be attached to the serial data input of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105, and data may be captured from these other devices. For example, data may be captured from a gas chromatograph or from a chemical sniffer. Sound may be recorded from a microphone. Average light intensity may be recorded from a photo cell. Infrared records of motion in the vicinity may be recorded. Data may be gathered from stationary machinery or data collection devices, such as flow meters or temperature sensors. Any type of data that has a spatial reference may be gathered in this manner.
Another embodiment of the invention is shown in FIG. 17. The computer 185 contains a positional database 322 established previously, in accordance with the teachings set forth above. The positional frame retrieval program 330 is actively retrieving images from the databases 322 and displaying them.
In this embodiment, the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 is not attached to the camera, but is attached by a serial communicator tether 3102 (which could include a radio linkage) directly to the serial port of the computer 185, such that the tracking and video data entry and storage program continuously accepts the data and stores it in the tracking database 324. The tracking data acquisition unit is thus enabled to be used as a mouse pointing device for the positional frame retrieval program 330 to guide in the retrieval and display of images—an inertial joystick.
The tracking database 324 may be on the hard disk as previously, but preferably it is a RAM circular buffer that is shared by the tracking database to positional database conversion program 310. Alternatively, the tracking data values may be sent as messages between the two programs running under Windows and subject to the standard Windows message dispatcher (not shown). Both of the programs 305 and 310 can be simplified, since neither is dealing with video or with frame numbers in this embodiment.
The tracking database to positional database conversion program operates continuously, receiving tracking data containing unnormalized acceleration and orientation data and converting it into normalized position and orientation data, and sending the resulting data directly to the positional frame retrieval program 330, thereby causing the program 330 to update the display continuously in response to manual movement of the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 through time and space.
As an alternative, two computers can be utilized. A first portable computer (not shown) can be attached to the tracking data acquisitional unit and modulator 105 can contain the program elements 305, 324, 310 and 330, shown in FIG. 17. This computer continuously computes the coordinates and position of itself in time and space and broadcasts this information by means of a radio LAN or serial port, for example, to a stationary computer that contains the positional database 322. The stationary computer broadcasts back the database information to the portable computer, where it is displayed. In this manner, a virtual world can be created where the one carrying around the portable computer can view a universe that exists in virtual form on the disk and that was recorded earlier at this or some other location.
As a third alterative, the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105 in FIG. 17 can be equipped with a video monitor receiving video signals from the computer 185 (by television transmission over a radio link, for example). Then one may wander about with the television and tracking data acquisition unit viewing a virtual reality derived from the positional database 322.
The arrangement illustrated in FIG. 17 can also be used as a three-dimensional pointing device for programs other than the positional frame retrieval program. Any kind of three-dimensional software program requiring the assistance of a navigation tool having either three or six degrees of freedom may be readily modified to accept the positional data records generated at 3104 by the tracking data acquisition unit and modulator 105.
Another embodiment of the invention utilizes a movie mapper 325 (FIGS. 19 to 35) to assist the user in retrieving and displaying the images. The program structure, defined by a series of nested objects, is depicted in overview in FIG. 26. The dynamics of event message transmission between objects is depicted in FIG. 27, and the most important data structures are in accordance with previously-described FIGS. 5 and 8. The operation of the program, as seen by the user, the window dynamics, and the program resources are depicted in FIGS. 34 to 40 and 43 to 46, which disclose a series of operating states and menus of the program.
The program 325 is written in Microsoft C++ to run under Microsoft Windows, Version 3.1. Some of the programs call upon routines contained within the Microsoft Video For Windows Development Kit, Version 1.1. All of the above may be obtained from Microsoft Corporation, 1 Microsoft Way, Redmond, Wash. 98052. The Media Control Interface “MCIWind” 10944 (FIG. 26) from the Video For Windows package is used to control the scrolling through the playback of video images within the AVI (audio video interleave) video child window, MCIView 10940, described below. Many of the array processing routines presented within the program file TLA_FILE, as well as the vector, array, and tensor allocation programs are taken from the book Numerical Recipes in C, 2nd Edition, by Press, Vetterling, Teukolsky, Flannery (Cambridge University Press. 1992) and from the program diskette that accompanies this book. (These routines have been placed in the public domain by the authors of the book).
With reference to FIGS. 19 to 26, and beginning with FIG. 19, when the user turns on the movie mapper 325, a main frame window 10100 opens up. The user first actuates the File popdown menu and calls for the display of an AVI file (a Microsoft Audio Video Interleave file). These files, in the present version of the invention, have file names with the suffix “.AVI”. In all respects, these files correspond to all of Microsoft's specifications.
The program 325 opens up the selected “*.AVI” file. It also looks for and attempts to open a telemetry file, containing the positional information, which has the same name and the file name suffix “*.TLA”. The “*.TLA” file must be prepared for this program by adding to the beginning of the file a single line of text. The line is “HDR<tab ><last frame number>” where <tab> is the tab character, and <last frame number> is the first number on the last line of the file. If no “*.TLA” file is found, the system issues an error message but permits one to browse through the “*.AVI” file in the normal Microsoft manner. The program also looks for and attempts to open an “*.MTA” file for its own use in defining overlay characteristics. An empty “*.MTA” file should be supplied, since the program will issue an error message and quit if none is found. The File popdown menu contains the usual list of Microsoft options, including Open AVI, Print, Print Preview, Print Setup, Exit, and a numbered list of recently opened AVI files to facilitate recalling a file recently opened.
The figures illustrate what happens when an AVI file BACK.AVI and its corresponding telemetry file BACK.TLA were successfully opened. Upon opening this file, the program 325 causes a Video child window 10110 to be opened, displaying in this case a view of the back yard of a private home. This video window is labelled at the top with “BLACK.AVI—Video” to identify both the file and the fact that this is the child window. The child window 10110 provides controls that are standard Microsoft controls for scrolling through a sequence of video images. These include a VCR-like control 10108. Clicking on this control starts the video playback if it is stopped, and stops it if it is running. The control is marked with a square when the video is playing, and it is marked with a triangle (shown) when the video is stopped. The Video popdown menu contains selections for changing the size of the video window to the original size, half the original size, or double the original size. A mouse-actuated slider control 10103 (FIG. 19) permits the user to position the video playback to any frame of the temporal video sequence. All of these functions are provided by Microsoft's utilities.
A View pulldown menu permits additional child windows to be opened that relate to the position information. The View menu provides the following options, which are described below:
    • Triple MCI
    • Plan
    • Elevation
    • Yaw
    • Pitch
    • Roll
    • Orientation
    • Overlay Visibility
    • Toolbar
    • Status
Actuating the Plan command causes a plan view: XY child window 10120 to open up, displaying the path 10123 over which the camera was moved during the process of recording the sequential images. This window is labeled: “BACK.AVI—Plan View: XY” to identify the file name as well as the nature of the view. While not clearly visible in FIG. 19, a large red dot 10128 identifies the precise position along the path 10123 where the camera was positioned when it recorded the image shown in the view window 10110. Smaller red dots 10126 and 10127 identify side frames which are shown to the left and right of the main frame when the “Triple Mci” View menu item is selected. Dark green dots show the field of view (fov) of the camera 10129, giving an indication of the direction the camera is pointing. When the “Play” button 10108 is pushed to commence a sequential playback of images, a series of red dots (again not clearly shown in FIG. 19) indicate the camera's track. These red dots are spaced apart to produce a dotted line effect following the path of the camera as it moves along the path in the X and Y directions. The color of the remaining points along the track is blue.
Activating the Elevation command causes an Elevational View: XZ child window 10130 to open up, displaying the camera path of movement as seen from the side, rather than from the top. The display in all other respects is identical to the plan view display just described.
Activating the Yaw command causes a Yaw View child window 10140 to open up, displaying the various yaw directions the camera assumed during the image recording process. Yaw may be thought of as compass direction.
Likewise, activating the Pitch command causes a Pitch View child window 10150 to open up, displaying pitch directions in a fashion analogous to the Yaw View above. Pitch is inclination of the camera in the vertical image plane, that is looking up and down. In this example, the images do not vary significantly in pitch.
Activating the Roll command opens a Roll View child window 10160, displaying roll directions as above. Roll is the tilt of the image plane from side to side, or leaning.
By clicking twice upon a point on the camera path in any of the child windows 10120, 10130, 10140, 10150, or 10160, the user may signal the program to switch to displaying the image closest to the point where the mouse pointer was clicked and having the desired position, angle, or orientation. This selection process provides a rapid method for retrieving and positioning the video for playback based upon the desired position of the camera when an image was captured.
Activating the Orientation View command causes a child window 10180 to open up, displaying the orientation of the camera (pitch, roll, and yaw) graphically. Unfortunately, the absence of colors in FIG. 19 makes the figure less than clear. The positive Y direction is indicated by the line 10181, with the negative Y direction indicated by the line 10182. Note that the line 10181 indicating positive Y is Bold, to serve as a reference line. The positive X direction is indicated by the line 10185, and negative X is indicated by the line 10186, the positive Z direction is indicated by the line 10188, and the negative Z direction is indicated by the line 10187.
The actual direction of the camera, when it captured the image shown in the child window 10110, is indicated by the line 10183, which appears half in red and half in blue in the actual program display (and does not match the bold black line 10189). The dotted line 10184 is a projection of the camera direction line 10183 onto the X-Y plane. As a sequence of images is displayed in response to actuation of the play control 10108, the red-blue line 10183 swings about, indicating the orientation of the camera, and the dotted line 10184 swings about below (or above) the line 10183 like a shadow at noontime on the equator.
Roll is represented by the ratio of blue and red portions of the line 10183. If the roll value is zero, then the line is half red and half blue. Roll in a clockwise direction increases the blue, while roll in a counterclockwise direction increases the red. A positive roll gives more red.
A toolbar containing push button controls (10141, 10142, etc.) appears in the window 10101 and may be selectively displayed or hidden by actuating the Toolbar command in the View pulldown menu. The push button 10141 is an alternate way to open a file. The push buttons 10142 and 10145 respectively wind to the first and the last frames, and the push buttons 10143 and 10144 respectively move back and forward by one frame at a time.
The push button 10146 zooms in, and the push button 10147 zooms out. These two push buttons control the portion of the video path that is displayed by the Plan View and Elevational View child windows 10120 and 10130, and the orientations shown in the Yaw View, the Pitch View, and the Roll View. To zoom in, and with reference to FIG. 19, the user uses the mouse to position the cursor and then, with the left mouse button held down, drags the cursor diagonally so that a mouse-defined rectangle 10122 is created within the child window 10120. The user then clicks the zoom in push button 10146. The Plan View: XY window's contents are then replaced by the contents of the marked rectangle, expanded out to fill the window (FIG. 28). The Elev View: XZ window's X axis is simultaneously zoomed, while the Z axis (vertical) is left as before. The points in the XY view which were outside the rectangle 10122 are excluded from the elevational view. Likewise, any angle not represented in the selected set of points is excluded from the Yaw View, the Pitch View, and the Roll View. This process may be repeated as often as desired, until only a few camera positions are shown individually in the display.
The user may also create a rectangle within the Elev: XZ window, if desired. When the zoom-in push button 10146 is actuated, the selected rectangle fills the XZ window, and the X axis of the XY window is zoomed in the X axis only. Points not within the XZ selection rectangle are then excluded from the elevational view.
The user may also create a rectangle in the Yaw View window 10140, the Pitch View window 10150, or the Roll View window 10160, if desired. When the zoom-in push button 10146 is actuated, the selected rectangle fills the window, and the Yaw, Pitch, or Roll values displayed within the selected rectangle expand to fill the display. Points in the Plan View: XY window 10120 and the Yaw View window 10140 which do not have yaw, pitch, and roll values within the resulting displayed Yaw View. Pitch View, and Roll View windows are excluded from the Plan View window and Elev XZ window.
Actuation of the zoom-out push button 10147 causes the plan and elevational displays to return to their original appearance (as shown in FIG. 19).
Actuating the Overlay Visibility . . . menu selection from the View menu causes the display of an Overlay Visibility dialog window 11110 (FIG. 29). The Overlay Visibility dialog lists five overlay items:—“Tombstones” 11120, “Entrances” 11130, “Exits” 11140, “Launch Pads” 11150, and “Grid (511160—each of which may be selected for display in the Video windows or the Plan View window. A check box for each item is provided under the Video and Plan columns of the dialog 11122, 11124, 11132, 11134, 11142, 11144, 11152, 11154, 11162. Check boxes under the Video column 11170 control display of items in the Video window 10110, while those in the Plan column 11180 control display of items in the Plan View window 10120. When the check box has an X in it, any overlay item of the corresponding type which may appropriately be displayed according to the current state of the program is displayed in the Video or Plan View window. Likewise, removing the X from the checkbox inhibits display of the corresponding line item.
The Overlay items listed above will be described later.
The final command in the View popdown menu is the Status command, which hides or displays a status line at the bottom of the window 10190 and which indicates such things as the frame number and the X, Y, Z, Yaw, Pitch, and Roll coordinates of the camera corresponding to the image that is being displayed.
The Frame pop down menu displays the following commands, all of which relate to simply positioning the video as if it were a continuous video tape recording:
    • Home
    • Back
    • Forward
    • End
Additionally, the Frame pop down menu displays the following commands which have a special meaning:
    • Loop Forward
    • Loop Backward
      The Loop Forward and Loop Backward selections cause the Video display to update with the next frame of video (Loop Forward) or previous frame (Loop Backward) in temporal sequence, continuously. Upon reaching the end of the video sequence, the sequence continues playback with the frame at the other end of the sequence, as though the video were joined in a continuous loop of film. Frames not shown in the Plan View window are skipped in the playback. Also, after each frame is shown, the Overlay Items appropriate to the frame are rendered onto the video frame display. The Overlay Items are described below.
The Loop Forward function may alternatively be started and stopped by striking the space bar. Each strike toggles the Loop Forward function between the started and stopped state.
The Action Menu has functions corresponding to the Toolbar buttons Zoom In 10146 and Zoom Out 10147. It also has functions corresponding to the Head Forward button 10148 and Head Back button 10149. Finally the Adjust Parameters function brings up a dialog box 10310 (FIG. 21) by which various parameters to be described later are adjusted.
The Head Forward 10148 and Head Back 10149 buttons and functions allow the user to move forward or back up from the currently displayed frame. The Head Forward frame and Head Back frame are shown as green dots 10123 and 10124 on the Plan View window, and as green rectangles 10420 and 10422 (FIG. 22) superimposed on the Video window. The Head Forward rectangle 10420 is projected onto the Video window and is superimposed on a spot on the Video window which corresponds to its spatial location as determined by the database. The Head Backward rectangle 10422 encloses the entire video area of the Video window.
The Head Forward frame is chosen by the program such that when it is displayed the appearance to the user is that the user has moved forward. This frame is selected in the following manner. Search all the frames in the telemetry file (*.tla) and determine which are within the front field of view angle from the perspective of the current frame.
The front field of view is defined here. Define a ray with its origin at the current frame's x-y location and extending in the direction of the yaw angle, called the centerline of the frame. Define a pair of rays with the same origin, called left and right lines of the frame, which make an angle with the centerline specified by the user in the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog (FIG. 21) Field of View Angle +/− item 10312. Define a Field of View (fov) of the current frame between the left and right lines of the frame. All frame points which lie within the field of view are said to be frames within the current frame's field of view.
Of all the frames within the field of view (fov), determine which are within an operator specified radius (the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Neighborhood Multiplier item 10320 (FIG. 21) times the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Neighbor Radius item 10318 (FIG. 21) of the current frame location and have a yaw angle that is within a specified maximum angular difference from the yaw angle goal. Of these candidate frames, find the frame that has the lowest valued FovIndexRating, defined as the sum of:
    • 1. the absolute angular difference between the yaw angles of the current frame and the candidate frame, and
    • 2. a weighted rating based on the distance of the xy location of the candidate frame from any point on the neighborhood circle around the current frame.
The weight given this distance error is proportional to the value of the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Selecting Side Angles scroll bar item 10340 (FIG. 21). This allows the operator to adjust the importance of the minimization of yaw differences or distance from the circle.
Sometimes there is not an appropriate frame. In that case, none are selected and no corresponding overlay is displayed.
The Head Back frame is calculated in an similar manner to that used to the Head Forward frame with the exception that this frame must lie in the rear field of view. The rear field of view is a yaw angle range that can be found by reflecting the front field of view angle range to the back of the current frame. These fields of view are the same magnitude and face in opposite directions. For the case of jumping backward, the yaw angle goal is equal to the yaw angle of the current frame.
The keyboard Up-arrow-key and letter I key also execute the Head Forward function, the keyboard Down-arrow-key and letter K key also execute the Head Back function.
The View menu-Triple Mci function causes the MCIview window to expand to include three video windows (FIG. 20). The one in the center is the same. The left and right windows contain frames of video selected from the data set on the basis of their proximity to the best theoretical frames to display both in x-y-z and in centerline. The frame on the left is chosen so that its centerline is close to twice the fov of the center frame. Likewise the frame on the right is chosen so that its centerline is close to twice the fov of the center frame, but in a direction to the right of the center frame's centerline. For example, if the fov is 30 degrees (meaning that the left line is 30 degrees less than the centerline and the right line is 30 degrees greater than the centerline on a compass), a left frame would be searched for in the database with a center line of approximately 60 degrees less than the centerline of the current frame.
If no frame is found that meets the criteria for selection, no frame is displayed. If a frame has been chosen for the left frame or the right frame, that frame is displayed within its own MCIwnd, located to the left or the right of the center frame.
The left and right frames are aligned with the center frames based on the fov and on the yaw and pitch values of the centerlines of the frames. The fov defines a “pixel per degree” displacement on the screen. For each degree the left or right frame's centerline disagrees with the predicted centerline (center frame's centerline plus or minus twice the fov) the frame is shifted a corresponding number of pixels. Likewise, the frame is shifted up or down by the pixel per degree amount by which the frame's pitch differs from the center frame's pitch.
The left arrow key and the J key on the keyboard select a new frame for viewing. Initially the frame selected is the displayed left frame described above. The 0 through 9 keys allow the selection of a frame (if one exists) which has a centerline less than twice the fov angle. Pressing the 1 key sets the goal centerline angle to the centerline angle of the current frame plus or minus 10 percent of twice the fov angle. The 2 key similarly sets the goal centerline angle to 20 percent of twice the fov angle. The 0 key sets the goal centerline angle to 100 percent of twice the fov angle. Note that this setting yields the frame which precisely abuts the center frame, since points on the edge of the center frame lie on a vertical plane extending from the current point of view which makes an angle of exactly “fov” degrees with the current frame centerline.
An overlay item represents a point or area of interest of the database as projected onto the current frame. Several overlay item types are defined by the movie mapper program. The overlay items which represent frames are the jump forward rectangle 10420 (FIG. 22), the jump backward rectangle 10422 (FIG. 22), the jump and turn left diamond 10424 (FIG. 22), the jump and turn right diamond 10426 (FIG. 22), the turn left triangle 11210 (FIG. 30), and the turn right triangle 11220 (FIG. 30). (See also 10220 in FIG. 20 where the left-turn triangle is shown in the panoramic view.)
Additionally, one or more frames may be defined as Entrance frames, marked on the Video Overlay window with an Entrance item 11230 (FIG. 30). An Entrance frame is a frame which is displayed as a result of the operator causing the viewer program to access a frame indexed within an area of the database known as an Exit area. The Exit area is described below. Like the Jump Forward frame, for example, the Entrance frame replaces the current frame in the video display window. An entrance frame may be contained within the same database which is currently being viewed, or may be from a different database. An entrance frame may be identified by the operator at any time by invoking the Objects-Create Entrance dialog 11300 (FIG. 31). The current frame is marked in the *.mta file associated with the currently open database with the operator supplied tag entered by the operator in the Entrance Name item 11320 (FIG. 31) of the Objects-Create Entrance dialog 11300 (FIG. 31). The Frame Number 11310 (FIG. 31) is supplied by the program when the dialog is invoked.
Three overlay item types describe areas rather than points. An Exit item marks an area of the Plan View containing frames of the current database which when viewed will cause the display of an associated Entrance frame. A Launch Pad area item 10722 (FIG. 25) causes the execution of an associated application program whenever a frame is displayed whose coordinates lie within the area defined for the Launch Pad area.
An Exit area is defined by the operator's actions:
The operator clicks on the Plan View window, holding the left mouse button down and moving the pointer to another point within the plan view window. This action creates a rectangle drawn on the Plan View 10122 (FIG. 19). The operator then invokes the Objects-Create Exit dialog 10500 (FIG. 23), and after filling in the dialog's entries, clicks the mouse on the OK button 10580 (FIG. 23). The dialog's Destination File item 10510 (FIG. 23) identifies the *.mta file associated with the database containing the desired Entrance, the named entrance which was defined by the procedure above. The Destination Name item 10520 (FIG. 23) selects the tag for the desired Entrance frame which was previously identified using the procedure described above for defining Entrance frames. Finally, the operator identifies the Exit area by entering an Exit name in the Exit Name item 10530 (FIG. 23), and completes the dialog by clicking the mouse on the OK button 10580 (FIG. 23).
A Launch Pad item is defined in a similar fashion. The operator clicks and drags on the Plan View window as above, and then invokes the Objects-Create Launch Pad dialog 10600 (FIG. 24). The operator fills in the Application File item 10610 (FIG. 24) with the name of an application to execute, the Command Line item 10620 (FIG. 24) with command line information if any, and gives the Launch Pad a name in the Launch Pad Name item 10630 (FIG. 24).
Each of these overlay items is projected onto the current video frame according to the overlay calculation code described above.
The Window pop down menu provides conventional Microsoft Windows window control functions that need not be described here. The Help popdown menu also needs no special explanation.
The object program structure of the movie mapper 325 is described in overview in FIG. 26, and the message paths connecting these program object elements are shown in FIG. 27. Taken together, and in conjunction with the preceding figures that illustrate the windows and program operation, FIGS. 19 to 35 present a full overview of the program 325.
The operating program is composed of a number of objects each of which is an instance of some class of objects. These objects are represented by rectangles in FIGS. 26 and 27. Objects sometimes create subsidiary objects. When this happens, the subsidiary objects are represented in FIG. 26 by smaller rectangles contained within the larger object rectangles that gave rise to them. Each object has properties which correspond to its particular class. Each object class has a name, and the properties of the class are defined by separate program listings for each class. To aid the reader in pursuing these programs, FIG. 26 presents the hierarchical arrangement of the objects that are present in the program 325 when it is actually operating. The class name of each object appears within the rectangle for the object.
When the program commences operating, it first appears as an object named CVidApp 10902 (FIG. 26). This object then creates a frame window derived from the Microsoft class CMainFrame 10905. This CMainFrame object appears on the screen as a large window frame 10100 (see FIG. 19) that includes a menu bar, a tool bar, and a status line, as has been described.
This CMainFrame object next launches a child frame derived from Microsoft's CMDIChildWnd that is of the class CMDITextWnd 10938. This object gives rise to a child window that is modified from the Microsoft original in that its title line (positioned above the window) may be dynamically altered while the program is in operation.
This first child object launches within itself an instance of the CMCIView 10940 object, which launches MCIWnd 10944 to display the sequence of video images.
The CMciView object 10944 also launches a CMCIWnd object 10950. The CMCIWnd object 10950 attaches itself to the MCIWnd object 10944 so that Windows operating system events come to the CMCIWnd 10950 object instead of being sent directly to the MCIWnd object 10944. In most cases the CMCIWnd 10950 object merely forwards the events to the MCIWnd object 10944. The CMCIWnd object 10950 intercepts mouse events, so that it may sense operator clicks on the overlay objects. The CMCIWnd object 10950 also intercepts MCIWnd redraw requests, forwards these requests to MCIWnd 10944 for video refresh, and then redraws the overlay objects associated with the video frame being displayed.
The CMciView and MCIView objects are the lower-most of the seven objects shown in FIG. 26 within the CMainFrame object 10905. Accordingly, the user sees upon the screen a large window 10100 (FIG. 19) within which a small window 10110 appears having video playback control 10108.
Six more windows may be opened by the user through activation of the View pop down menu, as has been described. Each of these windows corresponds to an additional pair of nested objects which appear within the CMainFrame object 10905 shown in FIG. 26.
If the user opens the Plan View: XY window 10120 (FIG. 19), then the object CMDITextWnd 10906 containing the object CPlanView 10920 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10120 in FIG. 19. If the user opens the Elev View:XZ window 10130, then the object CMDITextWnd 10911 containing the object CElevView 10935 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10130 in FIG. 19. If the user opens the Orient View window 10180, then the object CMDITextWnd 10914 containing the object COrientView 10945 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10180 in FIG. 19.
If the user opens the Yaw View window 10140, then the object CMDITextWnd 10918 containing the object CYawView 10910 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10140 in FIG. 19.
If the user opens the Pitch View window 10195, then the object CMDITextWnd 10923 containing the object CPitchView 10925 is created within the CMainFrame object 10905, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10195 in FIG. 19.
If the user opens the Roll View window 10160, then the object CMDITextWnd 10923 containing the object CRollView 10915 is created within the CMainFrame object, and this pair of objects together create the child window shown at 10160 in FIG. 19.
As the user closes the windows, the corresponding pairs of objects are destroyed.
The objects, once created, send messages back and forth to each other over the paths illustrated in FIG. 27. The following discussion does not consider messages directed to the window frames (to adjust the frame size, for example) and to the child window frame object instances CMDITextWnd, which are not shown to simplify FIG. 27.
When the user “talks” to the program, using the keyboard or mouse, in general the user communicates with the active window (in the case of the keyboard) or the window that the mouse is in (in the case of the mouse), selecting a different active window by clicking within the window boundaries. The nine windows shown in FIG. 19 to which the user “talks” correspond to the ten objects numbered 10905, 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, 10944, 10945, and 10950 in FIGS. 26 and 27. So these ten objects receive messages from the user and must respond.
The central coordinating object is the document object, which is an instance of CVidDoc 10927 which is derived from the class Cdocument (a Microsoft class). This object contains the key system variables that determine the state of the system. Included, as illustrated in FIG. 27, are the name of the file being processed, the number of the current frame being displayed, the current zoom level, the minimum and maximum values of coordinates that are used in the displays, and an object 10909 which is an instance of the class Tla_File, which stores and manipulates the positional data. (The minimum and maximum values of the coordinates are derived from the file data itself as the extreme values found within this object.)
If any window receives a message that calls for adjustment of one of the key system variables, that message is sent immediately to the document object CVidDoc 10907. The value of the key variable is adjusted, and then the document object 10907 broadcasts an “Update All Views” message over the path 10980 to the MCIWnd child window object 10944, over path 10911 to object 10910, over path 10921 to object 10920, over path 10926 to object 10925, over path 10916 to object 10915, over path 10936 to object 10935, over path 10941 to object 10940, and over path 10946 to object 10945. Each responds accordingly. The “Update All Views” message contains a hint that says either:
    • 1. Rewrite Everything, or
    • 2. Just Do Current Frame.
      The “rewrite everything” hint causes each window to be redrawn completely. The “just do current frame” hint causes, for example, just one point to be changed from blue to red.
The individual window objects next communicate with the document object 10907 over paths 10911, 10916, 10921, 10926, 10936, 10941, and 10946 and receive information via paths 10912, 10917, 10922, 10927, 10937, 10942, and 10947 to learn of the new state of the system and to retrieve from the document object 10907 whatever data they need to update their respective windows. For example, if the user at 10902 clicks upon the “zoom out” push button 10146 (FIG. 19), this action is communicated to the object CMainFrame 10905 associated with the outer window frame. The object 10905 communicates this message over the path 10904 to the document object 10907. The Zoom Level variable is updated within the object 10907, and an “Update All Views—Rewrite Everything” message is broadcast over the paths 10911, 10916, 10921, 10926, 10936, 10941, 10946, and 10980 to the remaining objects, except for the CMciWnd object 10950. This object receives its update messages before they are sent to the MCIWnd object 10944, and are re-routed by the operating system. Then each of the objects 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, and 10945 must send messages to the document object 10907 requesting all of the positional information (from “Tla_File”) so that they may repaint their plots of camera motion. They also request the current frame number so that they can color the plot of the current frame position red in color. The object 10944, which simply needs to recompute and display the camera's orientation when capturing the current frame, simply requests the current frame number and the positional data relevant to that one frame. The object 10944, after verifying that the current frame value has not changed, simply does nothing in this case.
Double clicking on the path in one of the windows 10110, 10120, 10130, 10140, 10150, 10160, and 10180 (FIG. 19) causes one of the objects 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, or 10945 to send a message to the document object 10907 reporting a new value for the current frame number. In response, the document object broadcasts over the paths 10912, 10917, 10922, 10927, 10937, 10942, 10947, and 10981 the message “Update All Views—Rewrite Everything” to the objects 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, 10944 and 10945. In response, the objects 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, and 10945 redraw their plots totally, requesting the necessary data from the document object 10907. The CMCIView object 10940, after determining, that the current frame had changed, would request the display of the designated new frame by the MCIWnd object from Microsoft 10944. That request is intercepted by CMciWnd object 10950, which refreshes the overlay after the MCIWnd object 10944 finishes its update. When the user clicks upon one of the positioning controls 10142, 10143, 10144, or 10145 in the tool bar (FIG. 19), these actions are communicated over the path 10903 to the CMainFrame object 10905 which, in a similar manner, sends a frame update message over the path 10904 to the document object 10907 and triggers a similar response to that just described.
When the user activates the video controls within the child window 10110 (FIG. 19) that contains the video image, the user is communicating directly with the Microsoft MCIWind object 10944. This object updates the display of the image as requested and sends a message indicating the new frame number to the object CMCIView 10940. The object 10940 must then communicate this action to the document object 10907 over the path 10942. In this case, if the MCIWind viewer is playing the video as an animated display, then the document object 10907 broadcasts a message over the paths 10912, 10917, 10922, 10927, 10937, 10942, 10947, and 10980 “Update All Views—Just Do Current Frame.” Accordingly, the objects 10910, 10915, 10920, 10925, 10935, 10940, and 10945 need simply to request information concerning the new current frame.
The program provides the facility of navigating through the video database by selecting frames of data from the database which represent translations and rotations from the position of the current frame's point of view. The program searches the database for frames which best meet the criteria, and the operator then selects one of these frames using the keys or mouse as described above. The following paragraphs describe the method the program uses to select the best frame for each of the possible operator choices (turn left, turn right, jump forward, jump backward, jump forward and simultaneously turn right, jump forward and simultaneously turn left).
First, the program initializes variables which are used to keep track of the best entry found for each of the selections above. Cw_slope is clockwise, and ccw_slope is counterclockwise. Fov is the slope data for the current frame. LeftDiag is the slope data for the frame to the left of the current frame, its centerline close to twice the fov counterclockwise of the current frame's centerline. RightDiag is the slope data for the frame to the right of the current frame, its centerline close to twice the fov clockwise of the current frame's centerline.
void Tla_File::select_field_of_view(unsigned short current_frame)
{
unsigned short fov_subset_index = MIN_FRAME_COUNT:// index used w/ subset array
unsigned short subset_index; // index used w/ data arrays
SlopeData Fov;
SlopeData LeftDiag;
SlopeData RightDiag;
float IndexCurrentSlope;
int current_x = get_x_data(current_frame); // get x coor for current frame
int current_y = get_y_data(current_frame); // get y coor for current frame
int index_x; // a coor of point/frame under test of being in camera's field of view
int index_y;
BOOL same_location; // true if indexed point and current point are same point or location
BOOL in_front_fov; // true if indexed point is in the camera's field of view at current pt
BOOL in_rear_fov; // true if indexed point is in the current pt camera's rear view mirror's fov
BOOL in_left_diag; // true if indexed point is in the left diagonal's range as seen from current
pt
BOOL in_right_diag; // true if indexed point is in the right diagonal's range as seen from current
pt
// time saving combination used in side frame selection tradeoff
// m_Selecting_Tradeoff is 1 to 17
float DistanceGain = (float)(NEUTRAL_DIST_GAIN * m_Selecting_Tradeoff /
DEFAULT_PRIORITY); // ~⅛ to 2+
// calc slope of line of clockwise field of view limit within the xy plan (plan view)
Fov.cw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) − (m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle / 2);
// calc slope of line of counterclockwise field of view limit within the xy plan (plan view)
Fov.ccw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) + (m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle / 2);
CalcSlopeData converts the cw_slope and ccw_slope angles of the current frame to the
tangent of the angles, with quadrant.
(FIG. 33. step 11520)
CalcSlopeData(&Fov); // calc variables used in testing slope limits. Means of testing if yaw in
bounds
// sets goal for side frame selection as fraction of m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle
float TurnAngleGoal = m_SideFrameGain * m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle;
// left is ccw and TurnAngleGoal is added to turn left
// right is cw and TurnAngleGoal is subtracted to turn right
if (TurnAngleGoal > m_MaxHeadingAngle) // note this is a new use for m_MaxHeadingAngle
{
// want right most limit of left diag range to be left of current yaw
LeftDiag.cw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) + TurnAngleGoal −
m_MaxHeadingAngle;
// want left most limit of right diag range to be right of current yaw
RightDiag.ccw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) − TurnAngleGoal +
m_MaxHeadingAngle;
}
else
{
LeftDiag.cw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame);
RightDiag.ccw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame);
}
// note this is a new use for m_MaxHeadingAngle
LeftDiag.ccw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) + TurnAngleGoal +
m_MaxHeadingAngle;
RightDiag.cw_slope = get_yaw_data(current_frame) − TurnAngleGoal −
m_MaxHeadingAngle;
CalcSlopeData converts the cw_slope and ccw_slope angles of the LeftDiag and RightDiag to the
tangent of the angles, with quadrant.
(FIG. 33, step 11530)
CalcSlopeData(&LeftDiag); // calc variables used in testing slope limits. Means of testing if
yaw in bounds
CalcSlopeData(&RightDiag); // calc variables used in testing slope limits. Means of testing if
yaw in bounds
m_FovSubsetIndexMax = NO_FRAMES;
float CurrentPointYaw = get_yaw_data(current_frame); // use for finding most aligned fov pt
float IndexPointYaw;
float Cos_CurrentPointYaw = (float)cos(CurrentPointYaw * DEG_TO_RAD);
float Sin_CurrentPointYaw = (float)sin(CurrentPointYaw * DEG_TO_RAD);
float xCurrentMinusIndex; // diff in x between current pt and index pt
float yCurrentMinusIndex; // diff in y between current pt and index pt
// in these rating, smaller is better
// used for selecting best frames to use for right and left mciwnds
float AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating; // rating by distance from current point adj for
angle
float WeightedRadiusDistanceRating; // rating by distance from neighbor hood radius
float LeftIndexRating; // measure of merit for indexed pt as left pt
float RightIndexRating; // measure of merit for indexed pt as right pt
float FovIndexRating; // measure of merit for indexed pt as fwd jump pt
float FwdSmallestDisplayRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
fwd jump pt so far
float RearSmallestDisplayRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
rear jump pt so far
float LeftSmallestDisplayRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
left display pt so far
float RightSmallestDisplayRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
right display pt so far
float LeftSmallestTurnRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
left turn pt so far
float RightSmallestTurnRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
right turn pt so far
float LeftSmallestDiagRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
left diag turn pt so far
float RightSmallestDiagRating = HIGH_VALUE_RATING; // best measure of merit for
right diag turn pt so far
float DisplayYawAbsDiff; // abs diff in yaw of limit yaw + trial display pts
float TurnYawAbsDiff; // abs diff in yaw of limit yaw + trial turn pts
float CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff; // abs diff in yaw of current and index pts
float IndexCurrentYawDiff; // signed diff in yaw of current and index pts
BOOL IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw; // is candidate frame's yaw pointing to left of
current yaw
float DistanceSquared; // square of distance betw index and current pts.
float NeighborRadiusSquared = m_NeighborRadius * m_NeighborRadius:
sqr of neighborhood radius
float MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared // sqr of multiplied limit of neighborhood radius
= m_NeighborhoodMultiplier * m_NeighborhoodMultiplier *
NeighborRadiusSquared;
The result variables are set to reflect the selection results when no frames are found. (FIG. 33, step
11510)
m_FovPtClosestInYaw = NO_FRAMES; // no closest point
m_RearFovPtClosestInYaw = NO_FRAMES; // no closest point
m_PtLeftFOV = current_frame; // if find nothing better, show behind current
point
m_PtRightFOV = current_frame; // if find nothing better, show behind current
point;
m_PtLeftTurn = current_frame; // if find nothing better, show over current point;
// no closest point
m_PtRightTurn = current_frame; // if find nothing better. show over current point;
m_PtLeftDiag = NO_FRAMES;
m_PtRightDiag = NO_FRAMES;
float LeftFovPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw + m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle; // don't
worry
if > 180′
float RightFovPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw − m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle; // don't
worry
if < −180′
float Left2FovPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw + (2 * m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle); // don't
worry
if > 180′
float Right2FovPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw − (2 * m_HorzFieldOfViewAngle); // don't
worry
if < −180′
float LeftTurnPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw + TurnAngleGoal; // don't
worry
if > 180′
float RightTurnPtYaw = CurrentPointYaw − TurnAngleGoal; // don't
worry
if < 180′
Now iterate through all frames in the database. (FIG. 32, Steps 11430, 11450, and 11465) The search
may be limited to a subset of the all the frames in the database, if the operator has zoomed in on one
of the data windows (Plan View, Elev. View, Yaw View, Pitch View, Roll View).
unsigned short frame_index;
if (m_zoom_subset_index_max != NO_FRAMES) // If there are points in reg subset
{
for (subset_index = MIN_FRAME_COUNT;
subset_index <= m_zoom_subset_index_max; // do all pts in reg subset defined by views
subset_index++
)
{
in_front_fov = FALSE;
in_rear_fov = FALSE;
in_left_diag = FALSE;
in_right_diag = FALSE;
frame_index = get_frame_from_zoom_subset(subset_index);
IndexPointYaw = get_yaw_data(frame_index);
Get the X and Y data for the frame. (FIG. 34, step 11610) In this loop “index” is the index of the
frame being tested. “Current” is the index of the currently displayed frame.
index_x = get_x_data(frame_index);
index_y = get_y_data(frame_index);
// calc offset using normal x,y axes
xCurrentMinusIndex = current_x − index_x;
yCurrentMinusIndex = current_y − index_y;
Calculate distance from current frame's location to index frame's location on plan view. (FIG. 34,
step 11620)
DistanceSquared = (float)(xCurrentMinusIndex*xCurrentMinusIndex +
yCurrentMinusIndex*yCurrentMinusIndex);
// calc slope of line from current point to point under test (subset_index point)
// first prevent divide by zero
same_location = FALSE;
Calculate yaw difference between current frame and index frame. Make sure to keep result in range
of +/− 180 degrees. (FIG. 34, step 11630)
IndexCurrentYawDiff = IndexPointYaw − CurrentPointYaw; // pos yaw is counter clockwise
if (((IndexCurrentYawDiff >= 0) // if candidate's yaw is closer to current pt's yaw in ccw dir
&& (IndexCurrentYawDiff <= 180) // but no wrap around that makes far really close on
other side
)
¦¦ ( IndexCurrentYawDiff < −180) // appears to be clockwise
// but does wrap around so makes big duff really close on
other side
)
{
IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw = TRUE;
}
else
{
IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw = FALSE;
}
CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(CurrentPointYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff = 360 − CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff;
}
Test for special cases of slope for the line between the index and the current. The math calculation
causes an error if the slope is vertical.
Then calculate slope in the more general case. (FIG. 34, step 11640)
// you would think that checking index_x and index_y would catch this
// but the math is sometimes inexact evidently so explicitly check if same point
if (current_frame == frame_index)
{
// two points are on exactly same spot. You cant see yourself in your field of
view
IndexCurrentSlope = 0; // s/b undefined, really.
same_location = TRUE:
}
else
{
if (index_x == current_x)
{
if (index_y > current_y)
{
IndexCurrentSlope = MAX_SLOPE:
}
else if (index_y < current_y)
{
IndexCurrentSlope = −MAX_SLOPE;
}
else
{
// two points are on exactly same spot. You cant see yourself in your field of
view
IndexCurrentSlope = 0; // s/b undefined, really.
same_location = TRUE;
}
}
else // ok tc calc slope. no divide by zero
{
IndexCurrentSlope = ((float)index_y − current_y) / (index_x − current_x);
}
}
Test the indexed point to find if it is in the front or rear field of view (fov) of the current frame, in the
RightDiag's fov, or in the LeftDiag's fov. Jump and turn right's frame will be selected from the
RightDiag fov. Jump and turn left's frame will be selected from the LeftDiag fov. (FIG. 34, step
11650)
// So, is the indexed point within the FRONT field of view of current point?
// Is it between the cw and ccw slope limits? If so, then in fov
// Note. Here x,y are data x,y, not display pixel x,y. First quadrant is pos x and pos y.
if ( index_y >= current_y)
{
if (index_x >= current_x) // index_quadrant = FIRST_QUADRANT;
{ // slopes in this quadrant are positive. pos x/ pos y
if (( (Fov.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope >=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
if (( (Fov.ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope <=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
in_front_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in left diag yaw range
if (( (LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= LeftDiag.cw_slope)// proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope >=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
if (( (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= LeftDiag.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope <=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
in_left_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in right diag yaw range
if (( (RightDiag.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= RightDiag.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( RightDiag.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope >=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
if (( (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= RightDiag.ccw_slope)// proper relationship
)
¦¦ (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // (IndexCurrentSlope <=
cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
in_right_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // if quadrant
else // (index_x < current_x) index_quadrant = SECOND_QUADRANT;
{ // slopes in this quadrant are negative. neg x/ pos y
if (( (Fov.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ ( Fov.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // must be ok so far
)
{
if (( (Fov.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ (Fov.ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // must be ok
)
{
in_front_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in left diag yaw range
if (( (LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= LeftDiag.cw_slope)// greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ ( LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // must be ok so far
)
{
if (( (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= LeftDiag.ccw_slope)// less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant = THIRD_QUADRANT) // must be ok
)
{
in_left_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in right diag yaw range
if (( (RightDiag.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= RightDiag.cw_slope) // greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ ( RightDiag.cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // must be ok so far
)
{
if (( (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= RightDiag.ccw_slope) // less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // must be ok
)
{
in_right_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // else quadrant
}
else // (index_y < current_y)
{
if (index_x >= current_x) // index_quadrant = FOURTH_QUADRANT;
{ // slopes in this quadrant are negative. pos x/ neg y
if (( (Fov.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ (Fov.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (Fov.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ ( Fov.ccw_quadrant == FIRST QUADRANT)
)
{
in_front_fov = TRUE:
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in left diag yaw range
if (( (LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >=. LeftDiag.cw_slope) // greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ (LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= LeftDiag.ccw slope) // less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ ( LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_left_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in right diag yaw range
if (( (RightDiag.cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= RightDiag.cw_slope) // greater than here means less negative
)
¦¦ (RightDiag.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= RightDiag.ccw_slope) // less than here means more negative
)
¦¦ ( RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_right_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // if quadrant
else // (index_x < current_x) index_quadrant = THIRD_QUADRANT;
{ // slopes in this quadrant are positive. neg x/ neg y
if (( (Fov.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (Fov.ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_front_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in left diag yaw range
if (( (LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= LeftDiag.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( LeftDiag.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= LeftDiag.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (LeftDiag.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_left_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
// see if in right diag yaw range
if (( (RightDiag.cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= RightDiag.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( RightDiag.cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= RightDiag.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (RightDiag.ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_right_diag = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // else quadrant
}
Calculate weighted distance rating, based on the neighbor radius set by the operator, which defines the
optimal distance to jump forward or backward from the current frame. (FIG. 34. step 11660)
WeightedRadiusDistanceRating = (float)(fabs(NeighborRadiusSquared − DistanceSquared) *
DistanceGain);
Test index point to see if it is better than the current candidate for the jump forward or jump backward
selection. (FIG. 32, step 11495)
if (!same_location) // indexed and current points are not at same x,y
{
FovIndexRating = CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff + WeightedRadiusDistanceRating;
// find ‘green dot’, jump forward point and find which pts are in forward
// field of view subset
if (in_front_fov) // if in field of view
{
// put this subset_index point in further subset of points in field of view
*(m_pFovSubsetIndex + fov_subset_index) = *(m_pZoomSubsetIndex + subset_index);
fov_subset_index++; // increment after using, get ready for loop
m_FovSubsetIndexMax++; // equal to highest index in this fov subset
if (m_FovPtClosestInYaw == NO_FRAMES) // if we don't have a current champion
{ // add criterion of keeping inside twice the neighborhood radius
if ((MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the double hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from current point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max limit
&& (CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
m_FovPtClosestInYaw = subset_index;
FwdSmallestDisplayRating = FovindexRating; // save for next candidate
comparison
}
}
else // have a valid champ
{
// if this fov pt has smaller total rating than defending champ
if ((FwdSmallestDisplayRating > FovIndexRating)
// add criterion of keeping inside twice the neighborhood radius
&& (MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from current point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max limit
&& (CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
m_FovPtClosestInYaw = subset_index; // save for next candidate
comparison
FwdSmallestDisplayRating = FovIndexRating;
} // end if new champ beats old champ
} // end else have a valid champ
} // end jump forward point
else // not in front fov
{
// So, is the indexed point within the REAR field of view of current point?
// Is it between the reverse cw and ccw slope limits? If so, then in rear fov
// Note. Here x,y are data x,y, not display pixel x,y. First quadrant is pos x
and pos y.
if ( index_y >= current_y)
{
if (index_x >= current_x) // index_quadrant = FIRST_QUADRANT;
{
if (( (Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // (−IndexCurrentSlope >=
rear_cw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
if (( (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT) // both same quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper
relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) //
(−IndexCurrentSlope <=
rear_ccw_slope) is automatic here
)
{
in_rear_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // if quadrant
else // (index_x < current_x) index_quadrant =
SECOND_QUADRANT:
{
if (( (Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == FIRST QUADRANT) // must be ok so far
)
{
if (( (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper
relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // must be ok
)
{
in_rear_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // else quadrant
}
else // (index_y < current_y)
{
if (index_x >= current_x) // index_quadrant = FOURTH_QUADRANT;
{
if (( (Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == FIRST_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_rear_fov = TRUE;
} // ccw
} // cw
} // if quadrant
else // (index_x < current_x) index_quadrant =
THIRD_QUADRANT;
{
if (( (Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope >= Fov.cw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ ( Fov.rear_cw_quadrant == SECOND_QUADRANT)
)
{
if (( (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == THIRD_QUADRANT) // both same
quadrant
&& (IndexCurrentSlope <= Fov.ccw_slope) // proper relationship
)
¦¦ (Fov.rear_ccw_quadrant == FOURTH_QUADRANT)
)
{
in_rear_fov = TRUE;
{ // ccw
} // cw
} // else quadrant
}
// see if have new champion, find rear fov pt most aligned in yaw to current
frame
if (in_rear_fov) // if in rear view field of view
{
if (m_RearFovPtClosestInYaw == NO_FRAMES) // if we don't have a current
champion
{ // add criterion of keeping inside twice the neighborhood radius
if ((MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the double
hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from current point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max limit
&& (CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
m_RearFovPtClosestInYaw = subset_index:
RearSmallestDisplayRating = FovIndexRating; // save for next candidate
comparison
}
}
else // have a valid champ
{
// if this rear fov pt has smaller total rating than defending champ
if ((RearSmallestDisplayRating > FovIndexRating)
// add criterion of keeping inside twice the neighborhood radius
&& (MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from current point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max
limit
&& (CurrentIndexYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
m_RearFovPtClosestInYaw = subset_index:
RearSmallestDisplayRating = FovindexRating; // save for next candidate
comparison
} // end if new champ beats old champ
} // end else have a valid champ
} // end if in rear fov
} // end else not in front fov
} // end if not same location
if m_FovPtClosestInYaw == current_frame) // s/b impossible but ...
{
AfxMessageBox(“Tla_File::select_field_of_view( ) m_FovPtClosestInYaw ==
current_frame”);
}
if (m_RearFovPtClosestInYaw == current_frame) // s/b impossible but ...
{
AfxMessageBox(“Tla_File::select_field_of view( ) m_RearFovPtClose_stInYaw ==
current_frame”);
}
Test index point to see if it is better than the current candidate for the jump and turn right or jump
and turn left selection. (FIG. 32, step 11495)
// looking for side frame candidates
if ((NeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the hood
&& (!same_location) // and indexed and current points do not have identical
x,y location
)
{
// the trig is there to forgive offset if the side frame is pointing in line
w/ the offset vector
// running from the current center point to the side frame. This is
because offsets are less
// noticeable if there are in the direction in which you are looking.
Move your head forward
// and back like a pigeon. Some movement of objects but not as
much as when you move
// your head left and right. Don't want to forgive completely so put
in a minimum.
AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating
= (float)((fabs(xCurrentMinusIndex * (fabs_quick_cos(IndexPointYaw) + 0.2))
+ fabs(yCurrentMinusIndex *
(fabs_quick_sin(IndexPointYaw) + 0.2))
)
* DistanceGain
);
// do left displayed frame
if (IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw == TRUE)
{
DisplayYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(LeftFovPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (DisplayYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
DisplayYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (DisplayYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
DisplayYawAbsDiff = 360 − DisplayYawAbsDiff;
}
// within neighborhood, within constrained subset
m_MaxHeadingAngle
// if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than defending
champ
LeftIndexRating = DisplayYawAbsDiff + AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating;
if (LeftSmallestDisplayRating > LeftIndexRating)
{
// if is actually pointing to the correct side but
not too far out
if (Left2FovPtYaw <= 180) // nothing weird
{
if ((IndexPointYaw > CurrentPointYaw)
&& (Left2FovPtYaw >= IndexPointYaw)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtLeftFOV = frame_index;
LeftSmallestDisplayRating = LeftIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
else // weird range split by +/− 180 line
{
if ((IndexPointYaw > CurrentPointYaw)
¦¦ (Left2FovPtYaw >= IndexPointYaw + 360)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtLeftFOV = frame_index:
LeftSmallestDisplayRating = LeftIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
}
Test index point to see if it is better than the current candidate for turn left turn or right turn selection.
(FIG. 32, step 11495)
// now choose the left turn frame
TurnYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(LeftTurnPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff = 360 − TurnYawAbsDiff;
}
// within neighborhood, within constrained subset
m_MaxHeadingAngle
// if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than
defending champ
LeftIndexRating = TurnYawAbsDiff + AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating;
if (LeftSmallestTurnRating > LeftIndexRating)
{
// if is actually pointing to the correct side
but not too far out
if (Left2FovPtYaw <= 180) // nothing weird
{
if ((IndexPointYaw > CurrentPointYaw)
&& (Left2FovPtYaw >= IndexPointYaw)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtLeftTurn = frame_index;
LeftSmallestTurnRating = LeftIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
else // weird range split by +/− 180 line
{
if ((IndexPointYaw > CurrentPointYaw)
¦¦ (Left2FovPtYaw >= IndexPointYaw + 360)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtLeftTurn = frame_index;
LeftSmallestTurnRating = LeftIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
}
} // end if IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw
else // on index yaw is to the right of the current yaw
{
// do right displayed frame
DisplayYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(RightFovPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (DisplayYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
DisplayYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (DisplayYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
DisplayYawAbsDiff = 360 − DisplayYawAbsDiff;
}
// within neighborhood, within constrained subset
m_MaxHeadingAngle
// if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than
defending champ
RightIndexRating = DisplayYawAbsDiff + AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating;
if (RightSmallestDisplayRating > RightIndexRating)
{
// if is actually pointing to the correct side but
not too far out
if (Right2FovPtYaw >= −180) // nothing weird
{
if ((IndexPointYaw < CurrentPointYaw)
&& (Right2FovPtYaw <= IndexPointYaw)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtRightFOV = frame_index;
RightSmallestDisplayRating = RightIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
else // weird range split by +/− 180 line
{
if ((IndexPointYaw < CurrentPointYaw)
¦¦ (Right2FovPtYaw <= IndexPointYaw − 360)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtRightFOV = frame_index;
RightSmallestDisplayRating = RightIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
} // end if m_PtRightFOV
// now choose the right turn frame
TurnYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(RightTurnPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff = 360 − TurnYawAbsDiff;
}
// within neighborhood, within constrained subset
// if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than
defending champ
RightIndexRating = TurnYawAbsDiff + AdjIndexCurrentDistanceRating;
if (RightSmallestTurnRating > RightIndexRating)
{
// if is actually pointing to the correct side but
not too far out
if (Right2FovPtYaw >= −180) // nothing weird
{
if ((IndexPointYaw < CurrentPointYaw)
&& (Right2FovPtYaw <= IndexPointYaw)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtRightTurn = frame_index;
RightSmallestTurnRating = RightIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
else // weird range split by +/− 180 line
{
if ((IndexPointYaw < CurrentPointYaw)
¦¦ (Right2FovPtYaw <= IndexPointYaw − 360)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtRightTurn = frame_index;
RightSmallestTurnRating = RightIndexRating;// save it as
benchmark
}
}
} // end if m_PtRightTurn
} // end if not IndexYawToLeftOfCurrentYaw
} // end if within neighborhood radius
Test index point to see if it is better than the current candidate for turn left frame or right frame display in
Triple Mci display mode. (FIG. 32, step 11495)
if (in_left_diag) // if in range
{
// now choose the left diag frame
TurnYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(LeftTurnPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff = 360 − TurnYawAbsDiff;
}
LeftIndexRating = TurnYawAbsDiff + WeightedRadiusDistanceRating;
if ((m_PtLeftDiag == NO_FRAMES) // if we don't have a current champion
// or if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than defending champ
¦¦ (LeftSmallestDiagRating > LeftIndexRating)
)
{
// the absolute standards
if ((MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the double
hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from turn point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max
limit
&& (TurnYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtLeftDiag = frame_index;
LeftSmallestDiagRating = LeftIndexRating; // save it as benchmark
}
}
} // end if in diag range
if (in_right_diag) // if in range
{
// now choose the left diag frame
TurnYawAbsDiff = (float)(fabs(RightTurnPtYaw − IndexPointYaw));
// Cant be further apart than 180
if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 360)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff −= 360;
}
else if (TurnYawAbsDiff >= 180)
{
TurnYawAbsDiff = 360 −TurnYawAbsDiff;
}
RightIndexRating = TurnYawAbsDiff + WeightedRadiusDistanceRating;
if ((m_PtRightDiag == NO_FRAMES) // if we don't have a current champion
// or if this pt is closer in yaw and in distance to goal than defending champ
¦¦ (RightSmallestDiagRating > RightIndexRating)
)
{
// the absolute standards
if ((MultipliedNeighborRadiusSquared >= DistanceSquared) // in the double
hood
// Use this point only if it is not too different from turn point's heading
// Note the first champ is closer to the current angle difference than max
limit
&& (TurnYawAbsDiff < m_MaxHeadingAngle)
)
{
// convert from subset index to frame
m_PtRightDiag = frame_index;
RightSmallestDiagRating = RightIndexRating; // save it as benchmark
}
}
} // end if in diag range
} // end for
if (m_PtLeftFOV == NO_FRAMES)
{
AfxMessageBox(“Tla_File::select_field_of_view( ) m_PtLeftFOV ==
NO_FRAMES”);
}
if (m_PtRightFOV == NO_FRAMES)
{
AfxMessageBox(“Tla_File::select_field_of_view( ) m_PtRightFOV ==
NO_FRAMES”);
}
if (m_FovPtClosestInYaw != NO_FRAMES) // if picked a point
{
if (get_frame_from_zoom_subset(m_FovPtClosestInYaw) == // s/b impossible
current_frame) but ...
{
AfxMessageBox(“Tla_File::select_field_of_view( ) m_FovPtClosestInYaw ==
current_frame”);
}
}
} // end if not m_zoom_subset_index_max
return:
}
The overlay window relates points and areas in the geometric space defined by the
camera's movements to points and areas within a particular video frame. Geometric points and areas
within the geometric space are projected to the camera's image plane using the following formula (In this
code fragment the calculation is done for a Tombstone type overlay, but the calculation is the same for
any overlay object.):
First, get the difference between the camera frame's x position and the overlay
object's's x position. (FIG. 35, step 11710)
numerator = −(m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].XCtr
− m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_x_data(ThisWndsFrame)
);
Next, get the difference between the camera frame's y position and the overlay object's y position. (FIG.
35, step 11720)
denominator = (m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m Tombstone[index].YCtr
− m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_y_data(ThisWndsFrame)
);
Calculate yaw angle of the line from the current frame's center to the point of interest. (FIG. 35, step
11730)
// calc angle of line from current point to this active tombstone
if (denominator != 0) // don't divide by zero
{
yawFrameToOverlay = (float)(RAD_TO_DEG * atan2(numerator, denominator));
}
else // denom is zero
{
// make ratio of num/denom big via a small denominator but avoid div by zero
yawFrameToOverlay = (float)(RAD_TO_DEG * atan2(numerator,
SMALL_ARBITRARY_FLOAT)):
}
Test to see if the yaw value for the angle to the point to be displayed is within the field of view of the
current frame. (FIG. 35. step 11740)
// if in limits, calc differential yaw, scale and display bar
if (((YawLimits == NORMAL_LIMITS)
&& ((yawFrameToOverlay >= yawMinFov) && (yawFrameToOverlay <= yawMaxFov))
// note &&
)
¦¦ ((YawLimits == WRAPPED_ LIMITS)
&& ((yawFrameToOverlay >= yawMinFov) ¦¦ (yawFrameToOverlay <= // note ¦¦
yawMaxFov))
)
)
{
If it is within the limits, calculate the offset from the middle pixel to the vertical line of pixels
corresponding to the object's yaw angle relative to the current frame's yaw angle. (FIG. 35, step 11748)
xPixel = (int)(xMidPixel + (xScale * tan(DEG_TO_RAD * (yawCurrentPt −
yawFrameToOverlay))));
Finally, the pitch of the current frame is used to choose a point on the vertical line determined above. The
calculation for CalcOverlayMarkers is described below. (FIG. 35, step 11750)
pitchFrameToOverlay =
CalcOverlayMarkers(&MarkerHalfWidth,
&MarkerHalfHeight,
m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].XCtr,
m_pDoc—>m_mta_file.m_Tombstone[index].YCtr,
ThisWndsFrame
);
This program segment calculates the point on the vertical line determined by yaw angle from the current
frame's centerline at which to project an x,y coordinate onto the current video frame. It presumes that the
photographed space is planar and is not inclined with respect to the gravitational normal. It uses a
CameraHeight setting, adjustable by the operator via the Action-Adjust Parameters dialog Camera Height
Above Floor entry 10316 (FIG. 21).
// calculate angle between horizon and line from camera (at m_pDoc—>m_tla_flle.m_CameraHeight off
flat floor)
// to a particular overlay marker. Flat floor assumes z doesn't change too much.
float CMciWnd::CalcOverlayMarkers(int *pHalfWidth, int *pHalfHeight, int xCtrZone, int yCtrZone,
unsigned short ThisWndsFrame)
{
float AngleHorizonToMarkerOnFloor;
double XYDistance;
// d = x{circumflex over ( )}2 + y{circumflex over ( )}2
XYDistance = ( xCtrZone − (double)(m_pDoc—>m_tla_flle.get_x_data(ThisWndsFrame)))
*( xCtrZone − (double)(m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_x_data(ThisWndsFrame))) +
 ( yCtrZone − (double)(m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_y_data(ThisWndsFrame)))
*( yCtrZone − (double)(m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.get_y_data(ThisWndsFrame)));
if (XYDistance <= 0)
{
TRACE(“CMciWnd::CalcOverlayMarkers, bad XYDistance after sqrt( )/n”);
AfxMessageBox(“CMciWnd::CalcOverlayMarkers, bad XYDistance before sqrt( )/n”);
return 0;
}
else if (XYDistance == 0)
{
XYDistance = (double)SMALL_ARBITRARY_FLOAT; // let's not divide by zero.
}
else
{
// take square root
XYDistance = sqrt(XYDistance);
}
// for this part of calc, ignore pitch of camera, assume level
// calc angle between horizon and line from camera to center of dropped avi
AngleHorizonToMarkerOnFloor =
(float)(RAD_TO_DEG * atan2(m_pDoc—>m_tla_file.m_CameraHeight,
XYDistance));
float SizeAdj = (float)(10 * m_pDoc—>m_tla_flle.m_CameraHeight / XYDistance);
*pHalfWidth = (int)(MAX_MARKER_WIDTH * SizeAdj);
*pHalfHeight = (int)(MAX_MARKER_HEIGHT * SizeAdj);
if (*pHalfWidth < MIN_MARKER_WIDTH)
{
*pHalfWidth = MIN_MARKER_WIDTH;
}
else if (*pHalfWidth > MAX_MARKER_WIDTH)
{
*pHalfWidth = MAX_MARKER_WIDTH;
}
if (*pHalfHeight < MIN_MARKER_HEIGHT)
{
*pHalfHeight = MIN_MARKER_HEIGHT;
}
else if (*pHalfHeight > MAX_MARKER_HEIGHT)
{
*pHalfHeight = MAX_MARKER_HEIGHT;
}
return AngleHorizonToMarkerOnFloor:
}
While the preferred embodiment of the invention has been described, it will be understood that numerous modifications and changes will occur to those skilled in the art. It is therefore intended by the appended claims to define the true scope of the invention.

Claims (21)

What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of the United States is:
1. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that position;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands;
wherein said image presentation and navigation means includes means for displaying, along with an image, a view of the camera path and an indication of the camera position and orientation when the image was recorded;
wherein camera position and orientation is indicated by a mark on the path oriented as the camera is oriented to point where the camera was pointing; and
wherein the view is a plan view and wherein the mark bears an indication thereon of the yaw angle of the camera.
2. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that position;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands;
wherein said image presentation and navigation means includes means for displaying, along with an image, a view of the camera path and an indication of the camera position and orientation when the image was recorded; and
wherein a mark appears in said image of a location associated with another image such that the user may signal a desire to navigate forward to view said another image in a simple manner.
3. A spatially referenced photographic system in accordance with claim 2 wherein the path also bears an indication of the location of said another image.
4. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that position;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands; and
wherein said image presentation and navigation means provides the user with navigation controls for moving backward, in response to the actuation of which controls said means selects an image captured at a generally backward camera position having an orientation similar to that of an image the user is currently viewing.
5. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that positions;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands; and
wherein said image presentation and navigation means provides the user with navigation controls for rotating left or right, in response to the actuation of which controls said means selects an image captured at a generally left-rotated or right-rotated camera position having a position fore-, aft-, and side-to-side similar to that of an image the user is currently viewing.
6. A spatially referenced photographic system in accordance with claim 5 wherein the image which the user is currently viewing bears marks indicating left and right possible rotations which thereby indicate the general location of the viewpoint of said image captured at said generally left-rotated or right-rotated camera positions.
7. A spatially referenced photographic system in accordance with claim 6 wherein the user signals a desire to move generally left or right by mouse clicking on said indicating marks.
8. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that position;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands; and
wherein said image presentation and navigation means provides the user with navigation controls for moving forward and simultaneously rotating to the left or to the right, in response to the actuation of which controls said means selects an image captured at a generally forward camera position having an angular orientation rotated to the left or to the right of that of an image the user is currently viewing.
9. A spatially referenced photographic system comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally viewed and the orientation of the image with respect to that position;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands;
said image presentation and navigation means providing the user with navigation controls, in response to the actuation of which controls said presentation and navigation means selects an image captured at a position generally shifted from that of an image the user is currently viewing, as indicated by the user actuation of said controls.
10. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 17 wherein the overlay item comprises a frame, wherein the computing device is configured to provide a new image corresponding to the overlay item in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the frame.
11. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 17 wherein the computing device is configured to provide a designation on at least one of the displayed image and a plan view of a position at which the displayed image was captured and a yaw orientation of the displayed image with respect to that position.
12. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing images of objects and information corresponding to the images, the information defining a position at which a respective image was captured and at least a yaw orientation of the respective image with respect to the position, wherein the information is derived from a camera position and orientation information automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with recording of the respective image;
a computing device in communication with the data base, the computing device configured to receive spatial movement commands and provide images for display in response to receiving the spatial movement commands via an interface;
wherein the computing device is configured to provide an overlay item projected onto a displayed image based on at least one of the respective images from the data base, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the displayed image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item; and
wherein the computing device is configured to provide, along with the displayed image and the overlay item projected onto the displayed image, navigation controls for moving forward and simultaneously rotating to the left or to the right, the computing device configured to provide in response to actuation of the navigation controls a selected image captured at a generally forward camera position having an angular orientation rotated to the left or to the right of that of the displayed image.
13. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing images of objects and information corresponding to the images, the information defining a position at which a respective image was captured and at least a yaw orientation of the respective image with respect to the position, wherein the information is derived from a camera position and orientation information automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with recording of the respective image;
a computing device in communication with the data base, the computing device configured to receive spatial movement commands and provide images for display in response to receiving the spatial movement commands via an interface;
wherein the computing device is configured to provide an overlay item projected onto a displayed image based on at least one of the respective images from the data base, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the displayed image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item; and
wherein the computing device is configured to provide, along with the displayed image and the overlay item projected onto the displayed image, navigation controls for moving backward, the computing device configured to provide in response to actuation of the navigation controls a selected image captured at a generally backward camera position having an orientation similar to that of the displayed image.
14. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing images of objects and information corresponding to the images, the information defining a position at which a respective image was captured and at least a yaw orientation of the respective image with respect to the position, wherein the information is derived from a camera position and orientation information automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with recording of the respective image;
a computing device in communication with the data base, the computing device configured to receive spatial movement commands and provide images for display in response to receiving the spatial movement commands via an interface;
wherein the computing device is configured to provide an overlay item projected onto a displayed image based on at least one of the respective images from the data base, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the displayed image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item; and
wherein the computing device is configured to provide, along with the displayed image and the overlay item projected onto the displayed image, navigation controls for rotating left or right, the computing device configured to provide in response to actuation of the navigation controls for rotating left or right an image captured at a generally left-rotated or right-rotated camera position having a position forward, backward, and side-to-side similar to that of the displayed image.
15. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing images of objects and information corresponding to the images, the information defining a position at which a respective image was captured and at least a yaw orientation of the respective image with respect to the position, wherein the information is derived from a camera position and orientation information automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with recording of the respective image;
a computing device in communication with the data base, the computing device configured to receive spatial movement commands and provide images for display in response to receiving the spatial movement commands via an interface;
wherein the computing device is configured to provide an overlay item projected onto a displayed image based on at least one of the respective images from the data base, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the displayed image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item; and
wherein the displayed image with the overlay item projected onto the displayed image includes designations indicating left and right possible rotations corresponding to a general location of a viewpoint of an image captured at generally left-rotated or right-rotated camera positions.
16. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 15 wherein the computing device is configured to provide the image captured at generally left-rotated or right-rotated camera positions in response to receiving signals indicating selection of one of the designations.
17. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing images of objects and information corresponding to the images, the information defining a position at which a respective image was captured and at least a yaw orientation of the respective image with respect to the position, wherein the information is derived from a camera position and orientation information automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with recording of the respective image;
a computing device in communication with the data base, the computing device configured to receive spatial movement commands and provide images for display in response to receiving the spatial movement commands via an interface;
wherein the computing device is configured to provide an overlay item projected onto a displayed image based on at least one of the respective images from the data base, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the displayed image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item; and
wherein the computing device is configured to provide, along with the displayed image and the overlay item projected onto the displayed image, navigation controls for moving forward and simultaneously rotating to the left or to the right, the computing device configured to provide in response to the actuation of the navigation controls an image captured at a generally forward camera position having an angular orientation rotated to the left or to the right of the displayed image.
18. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 17 wherein the computing device is configured to provide multiple images aligned in a panorama to provide a wider field of view.
19. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 17 wherein the computing device is configured to provide a plan view overlay item projected as a region onto the displayed image, the plan view overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest on the plan view with respect to which one or more associated images are available, wherein the computing device is configured to provide a new image corresponding to the plan view overlay item in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the region.
20. The spatially referenced photographic apparatus of claim 17 wherein the computing device is configured to provide a new image corresponding to the overlay item in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item.
21. A spatially referenced photographic apparatus comprising:
a data base containing plural images of objects and also containing information corresponding to said images defining the position at which each image was originally captured and at least the yaw orientation of the image with respect to that position, wherein recorded information from which said position and yaw orientation information may be determined was automatically recorded substantially simultaneously with the recording of the image;
image presentation and navigation means for displaying the images to a user and for facilitating the user in navigating among said images by receiving spatial movement commands from the user, as indicated by said spatial movement commands;
said image presentation and navigation means providing to the user, for display in combination with the images and an overlay item, navigation controls, in response to the actuation of which controls said presentation and navigation means selects an image captured at a position generally shifted from that of an image the user is currently viewing, as indicated by the user actuation of said controls; and
said image presentation and navigation means providing the user an overlay item projected onto the image the user is currently viewing, the overlay item comprising an indication of a point or area of interest for the image with respect to which one or more associated images are available in response to receiving signals indicating selection of the overlay item.
US13/084,087 1995-01-31 2011-04-11 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement Expired - Fee Related USRE44925E1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/084,087 USRE44925E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2011-04-11 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US38347195A 1995-01-31 1995-01-31
PCT/US1996/001434 WO1996024216A1 (en) 1995-01-31 1996-01-31 Spatial referenced photography
US09/723,767 US7050102B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2000-11-28 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US12/126,664 USRE42289E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2008-05-23 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US13/084,087 USRE44925E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2011-04-11 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/723,767 Reissue US7050102B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2000-11-28 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
USRE44925E1 true USRE44925E1 (en) 2014-06-03

Family

ID=23513320

Family Applications (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US08/894,206 Expired - Fee Related US6195122B1 (en) 1995-01-31 1996-01-31 Spatial referenced photography
US08/900,046 Expired - Lifetime US6292215B1 (en) 1995-01-31 1997-07-24 Apparatus for referencing and sorting images in a three-dimensional system
US09/723,767 Ceased US7050102B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2000-11-28 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US12/126,664 Expired - Fee Related USRE42289E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2008-05-23 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US13/084,087 Expired - Fee Related USRE44925E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2011-04-11 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement

Family Applications Before (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US08/894,206 Expired - Fee Related US6195122B1 (en) 1995-01-31 1996-01-31 Spatial referenced photography
US08/900,046 Expired - Lifetime US6292215B1 (en) 1995-01-31 1997-07-24 Apparatus for referencing and sorting images in a three-dimensional system
US09/723,767 Ceased US7050102B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2000-11-28 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US12/126,664 Expired - Fee Related USRE42289E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2008-05-23 Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (5) US6195122B1 (en)
EP (1) EP0807352A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1996024216A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140088928A1 (en) * 2012-09-27 2014-03-27 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Constructing Three Dimensional Model Using User Equipment
US8989434B1 (en) * 2010-04-05 2015-03-24 Google Inc. Interactive geo-referenced source imagery viewing system and method
US10217283B2 (en) 2015-12-17 2019-02-26 Google Llc Navigation through multidimensional images spaces
US10600245B1 (en) * 2014-05-28 2020-03-24 Lucasfilm Entertainment Company Ltd. Navigating a virtual environment of a media content item
US20210042522A1 (en) * 2018-02-08 2021-02-11 Fugro N.V. Method of and apparatus for analyzing images
US10943396B1 (en) 2016-09-30 2021-03-09 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Synchronizing transmitted video data and enhancements
US10950049B1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2021-03-16 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Augmenting transmitted video data
US11103787B1 (en) 2010-06-24 2021-08-31 Gregory S. Rabin System and method for generating a synthetic video stream
US11295525B1 (en) 2016-09-30 2022-04-05 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Augmenting transmitted video data
US11802968B2 (en) 2017-05-31 2023-10-31 Woven By Toyota, U.S., Inc. System of vehicles equipped with imaging equipment for high-definition near real-time map generation

Families Citing this family (188)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0807352A1 (en) 1995-01-31 1997-11-19 Transcenic, Inc Spatial referenced photography
US6181371B1 (en) * 1995-05-30 2001-01-30 Francis J Maguire, Jr. Apparatus for inducing attitudinal head movements for passive virtual reality
US8330812B2 (en) * 1995-05-30 2012-12-11 Simulated Percepts, Llc Method and apparatus for producing and storing, on a resultant non-transitory storage medium, computer generated (CG) video in correspondence with images acquired by an image acquisition device tracked in motion with respect to a 3D reference frame
US7453451B1 (en) 1999-03-16 2008-11-18 Maguire Francis J Jr Moveable headrest for viewing images from different directions
US6011585A (en) * 1996-01-19 2000-01-04 Apple Computer, Inc. Apparatus and method for rotating the display orientation of a captured image
US20030020824A1 (en) * 1996-10-24 2003-01-30 Yujiro Ito Camera apparatus
US6600511B1 (en) * 1997-01-08 2003-07-29 Pentax Corporation Camera for use in photogrammetric analytical measurement
US5973734A (en) 1997-07-09 1999-10-26 Flashpoint Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for correcting aspect ratio in a camera graphical user interface
US6466701B1 (en) * 1997-09-10 2002-10-15 Ricoh Company, Ltd. System and method for displaying an image indicating a positional relation between partially overlapping images
US6561428B2 (en) * 1997-10-17 2003-05-13 Hand Held Products, Inc. Imaging device having indicia-controlled image parsing mode
US6342917B1 (en) * 1998-01-16 2002-01-29 Xerox Corporation Image recording apparatus and method using light fields to track position and orientation
US6278479B1 (en) * 1998-02-24 2001-08-21 Wilson, Hewitt & Associates, Inc. Dual reality system
US6522325B1 (en) 1998-04-02 2003-02-18 Kewazinga Corp. Navigable telepresence method and system utilizing an array of cameras
JP4296451B2 (en) * 1998-06-22 2009-07-15 株式会社日立製作所 Image recording device
US6590607B1 (en) * 1998-08-19 2003-07-08 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Method and apparatus for storing an uninterrupted digital video stream
GB9824334D0 (en) * 1998-11-07 1998-12-30 Orad Hi Tec Systems Ltd Interactive video & television systems
US6317141B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2001-11-13 Flashpoint Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for editing heterogeneous media objects in a digital imaging device
US6337688B1 (en) * 1999-01-29 2002-01-08 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for constructing a virtual reality environment from spatially related recorded images
US6748158B1 (en) * 1999-02-01 2004-06-08 Grass Valley (U.S.) Inc. Method for classifying and searching video databases based on 3-D camera motion
DE19910147A1 (en) * 1999-02-26 2000-08-31 Michael Stahl System for recording and playing back video images
US7620909B2 (en) * 1999-05-12 2009-11-17 Imove Inc. Interactive image seamer for panoramic images
US6618052B1 (en) * 1999-06-22 2003-09-09 Trimble Navigation Ltd. Method and apparatus of graphical display of information
EP1102271B8 (en) * 1999-11-05 2016-12-07 Sony Europe Limited Method of generating audio and/or video signals and apparatus therefore
US6604064B1 (en) * 1999-11-29 2003-08-05 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Moving weapons platform simulation system and training method
JP4366801B2 (en) * 1999-12-28 2009-11-18 ソニー株式会社 Imaging device
US6650402B2 (en) * 2000-02-10 2003-11-18 Oceanit Laboratories, Inc. Omni-directional cloud height indicator
TW516685U (en) * 2000-03-14 2003-01-01 Darfon Electronics Corp Touch-type pointing rod
US7554578B2 (en) 2000-07-11 2009-06-30 Phase One A/S Digital camera with integrated accelerometers
US6791561B1 (en) * 2000-08-22 2004-09-14 Sony Corporation Method and apparatus for rendering video data
JP2002112098A (en) * 2000-10-03 2002-04-12 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Electronic image pickup apparatus
US6895126B2 (en) 2000-10-06 2005-05-17 Enrico Di Bernardo System and method for creating, storing, and utilizing composite images of a geographic location
WO2002037419A1 (en) * 2000-10-30 2002-05-10 Mark Peters Apparatus and method for the construction of spatial representations
US7742073B1 (en) * 2000-11-01 2010-06-22 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and apparatus for tracking an object of interest using a camera associated with a hand-held processing device
US6400264B1 (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-06-04 Chi-Sheng Hsieh Community far end intelligent image monitor
US7007243B2 (en) 2000-12-20 2006-02-28 Eastman Kodak Company Method and apparatus for producing digital images with embedded image capture location icons
US6948124B2 (en) * 2000-12-20 2005-09-20 Eastman Kodak Company Graphical user interface utilizing three-dimensional scatter plots for visual navigation of pictures in a picture database
KR100360272B1 (en) * 2000-12-23 2002-11-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Azimuth display apparatus and method for image terminal
US6980333B2 (en) * 2001-04-11 2005-12-27 Eastman Kodak Company Personalized motion imaging system
JP4672190B2 (en) * 2001-04-26 2011-04-20 三菱電機株式会社 Video navigation device
US7725604B1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2010-05-25 Palmsource Inc. Image run encoding
US6942151B2 (en) * 2001-05-15 2005-09-13 Welch Allyn Data Collection, Inc. Optical reader having decoding and image capturing functionality
US7111787B2 (en) 2001-05-15 2006-09-26 Hand Held Products, Inc. Multimode image capturing and decoding optical reader
US6834807B2 (en) * 2001-07-13 2004-12-28 Hand Held Products, Inc. Optical reader having a color imager
US7375755B2 (en) * 2001-08-30 2008-05-20 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing apparatus and method for displaying an image and posture information
US7134088B2 (en) * 2001-09-24 2006-11-07 Tactical Survey Group, Inc. Method and system for providing tactical information during crisis situations
JP3726733B2 (en) * 2001-10-16 2005-12-14 コニカミノルタフォトイメージング株式会社 Shooting system
US6759979B2 (en) * 2002-01-22 2004-07-06 E-Businesscontrols Corp. GPS-enhanced system and method for automatically capturing and co-registering virtual models of a site
US20030184594A1 (en) * 2002-03-25 2003-10-02 John Ellenby Apparatus and methods for interfacing with remote addressing systems
US6915310B2 (en) * 2002-03-28 2005-07-05 Harris Corporation Three-dimensional volumetric geo-spatial querying
WO2003093954A2 (en) * 2002-05-03 2003-11-13 Pixearth, Corporation A system to navigate within images spatially referenced to a computed space
US6940540B2 (en) * 2002-06-27 2005-09-06 Microsoft Corporation Speaker detection and tracking using audiovisual data
US20040032491A1 (en) * 2002-08-15 2004-02-19 Don Woody Frame grabber for image processing in ingress/egress control system
US6876926B2 (en) * 2002-09-26 2005-04-05 Honeywell International Inc. Method and system for processing pulse signals within an inertial navigation system
US6833811B2 (en) 2002-10-07 2004-12-21 Harris Corporation System and method for highly accurate real time tracking and location in three dimensions
US8797402B2 (en) * 2002-11-19 2014-08-05 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Methods and apparatus for imaging and displaying a navigable path
JP4136859B2 (en) * 2003-01-10 2008-08-20 キヤノン株式会社 Position and orientation measurement method
US7876359B2 (en) * 2003-01-17 2011-01-25 Insitu, Inc. Cooperative nesting of mechanical and electronic stabilization for an airborne camera system
US7602415B2 (en) * 2003-01-17 2009-10-13 Insitu, Inc. Compensation for overflight velocity when stabilizing an airborne camera
US7460148B1 (en) * 2003-02-19 2008-12-02 Rockwell Collins, Inc. Near real-time dissemination of surveillance video
US20040196369A1 (en) * 2003-03-07 2004-10-07 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Monitoring system
US7071970B2 (en) * 2003-03-10 2006-07-04 Charles Benton Video augmented orientation sensor
US7911497B2 (en) * 2003-04-25 2011-03-22 Lockheed Martin Corporation Method and apparatus for video on demand
US20040217940A1 (en) * 2003-04-29 2004-11-04 Chi-Pao Huang Method of Displaying Items in an On Screen Display
US7526718B2 (en) * 2003-04-30 2009-04-28 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Apparatus and method for recording “path-enhanced” multimedia
US7233316B2 (en) * 2003-05-01 2007-06-19 Thomson Licensing Multimedia user interface
US7637430B2 (en) 2003-05-12 2009-12-29 Hand Held Products, Inc. Picture taking optical reader
EP1632899A4 (en) * 2003-06-10 2008-07-16 Fujitsu Ltd Image register, display controller, image server
US8294712B2 (en) * 2003-09-19 2012-10-23 The Boeing Company Scalable method for rapidly detecting potential ground vehicle under cover using visualization of total occlusion footprint in point cloud population
WO2005031502A2 (en) * 2003-09-22 2005-04-07 Kim Hyeung-Yun Methods for monitoring structural health conditions
US7327383B2 (en) * 2003-11-04 2008-02-05 Eastman Kodak Company Correlating captured images and timed 3D event data
US7496293B2 (en) * 2004-01-14 2009-02-24 Elbit Systems Ltd. Versatile camera for various visibility conditions
US20050222801A1 (en) * 2004-04-06 2005-10-06 Thomas Wulff System and method for monitoring a mobile computing product/arrangement
US8250613B2 (en) 2004-04-29 2012-08-21 Harris Corporation Media asset management system for managing video news segments and associated methods
US8230467B2 (en) * 2004-04-29 2012-07-24 Harris Corporation Media asset management system for managing video segments from an aerial sensor platform and associated method
US7743064B2 (en) * 2004-04-29 2010-06-22 Harris Corporation Media asset management system for managing video segments from fixed-area security cameras and associated methods
US8045009B2 (en) * 2004-05-10 2011-10-25 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Image-exposure systems and methods using detecting motion of a camera to terminate exposure
JP5072194B2 (en) * 2004-05-14 2012-11-14 キヤノン株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, storage medium, and program
US20050289590A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2005-12-29 Cheok Adrian D Marketing platform
US20050285878A1 (en) * 2004-05-28 2005-12-29 Siddharth Singh Mobile platform
US7295220B2 (en) * 2004-05-28 2007-11-13 National University Of Singapore Interactive system and method
US7474318B2 (en) * 2004-05-28 2009-01-06 National University Of Singapore Interactive system and method
US8751156B2 (en) 2004-06-30 2014-06-10 HERE North America LLC Method of operating a navigation system using images
US7236235B2 (en) * 2004-07-06 2007-06-26 Dimsdale Engineering, Llc System and method for determining range in 3D imaging systems
US7697748B2 (en) * 2004-07-06 2010-04-13 Dimsdale Engineering, Llc Method and apparatus for high resolution 3D imaging as a function of camera position, camera trajectory and range
CN101010700B (en) * 2004-08-23 2010-05-26 盖姆卡斯特公司 Apparatus, methods and systems for viewing and manipulating a virtual environment
US20050280706A1 (en) * 2004-08-25 2005-12-22 Chiou-muh Jong Method and apparatus to simulate an outdoor window for panorama viewing from a room
US7929800B2 (en) 2007-02-06 2011-04-19 Meadow William D Methods and apparatus for generating a continuum of image data
US8207964B1 (en) 2008-02-22 2012-06-26 Meadow William D Methods and apparatus for generating three-dimensional image data models
US7293712B2 (en) 2004-10-05 2007-11-13 Hand Held Products, Inc. System and method to automatically discriminate between a signature and a dataform
US7738484B2 (en) * 2004-12-13 2010-06-15 Intel Corporation Method, system, and apparatus for system level initialization
US7734741B2 (en) * 2004-12-13 2010-06-08 Intel Corporation Method, system, and apparatus for dynamic reconfiguration of resources
JP4926400B2 (en) * 2004-12-27 2012-05-09 京セラ株式会社 Mobile camera system
US7774712B2 (en) * 2004-12-31 2010-08-10 A Far Site Better, Llc Methods and systems for displaying an enlarged image
US20060169021A1 (en) * 2005-01-28 2006-08-03 Silverstein D A Method and apparatus for calibration of a motion sensing device in a portable apparatus
GB2425907A (en) * 2005-05-05 2006-11-08 Vitec Group Plc Improvements in or relating to camera mounting
US20070171049A1 (en) * 2005-07-15 2007-07-26 Argasinski Henry E Emergency response imaging system and method
US20070030348A1 (en) * 2005-08-04 2007-02-08 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Wireless communication device with range finding functions
KR100708178B1 (en) 2005-09-01 2007-04-16 삼성전자주식회사 Method for image processing, apparatus and information storage medium storing image information therefor
US20070070233A1 (en) * 2005-09-28 2007-03-29 Patterson Raul D System and method for correlating captured images with their site locations on maps
JP2007142565A (en) * 2005-11-15 2007-06-07 Olympus Imaging Corp Imaging apparatus and method thereof
US20070116457A1 (en) * 2005-11-22 2007-05-24 Peter Ljung Method for obtaining enhanced photography and device therefor
TWI300473B (en) * 2005-12-14 2008-09-01 Ind Tech Res Inst A status sensing mechanism and the cursor-control device applying the same
IL172995A (en) * 2006-01-05 2011-07-31 Gadi Royz Method and apparatus for making a virtual movie for use in exploring a site
US7302359B2 (en) * 2006-02-08 2007-11-27 Honeywell International Inc. Mapping systems and methods
JP4684147B2 (en) * 2006-03-28 2011-05-18 任天堂株式会社 Inclination calculation device, inclination calculation program, game device, and game program
US8712192B2 (en) * 2006-04-20 2014-04-29 Microsoft Corporation Geo-coding images
JP4645519B2 (en) * 2006-04-27 2011-03-09 株式会社デンソー Arithmetic processing device, control device and program
JP2007306353A (en) * 2006-05-12 2007-11-22 Opt Kk Method for displaying moving picture, moving picture display system and imaging apparatus for wide angle moving picture
US7907750B2 (en) * 2006-06-12 2011-03-15 Honeywell International Inc. System and method for autonomous object tracking
US8453060B2 (en) * 2006-08-25 2013-05-28 Microsoft Corporation Panoramic ring user interface
US9224145B1 (en) 2006-08-30 2015-12-29 Qurio Holdings, Inc. Venue based digital rights using capture device with digital watermarking capability
US7835544B2 (en) * 2006-08-31 2010-11-16 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Method and system for far field image absolute navigation sensing
WO2008044607A1 (en) * 2006-10-04 2008-04-17 Nikon Corporation Electronic camera
US20080143709A1 (en) * 2006-12-14 2008-06-19 Earthmine, Inc. System and method for accessing three dimensional information from a panoramic image
US8250921B2 (en) 2007-07-06 2012-08-28 Invensense, Inc. Integrated motion processing unit (MPU) with MEMS inertial sensing and embedded digital electronics
US8462109B2 (en) * 2007-01-05 2013-06-11 Invensense, Inc. Controlling and accessing content using motion processing on mobile devices
JP5245260B2 (en) * 2007-02-27 2013-07-24 富士通セミコンダクター株式会社 File processing program, file processing method, file processing apparatus, and function program
US7657394B1 (en) * 2007-03-12 2010-02-02 Livermore Software Technology Corporation Direct determination of rigid body motion using data collected from independent accelerometers
US8669845B1 (en) 2007-03-30 2014-03-11 Vail Resorts, Inc. RFID skier monitoring systems and methods
EP1983740A1 (en) * 2007-04-16 2008-10-22 STMicroelectronics (Research & Development) Limited Image stabilisation method and apparatus
US7990394B2 (en) 2007-05-25 2011-08-02 Google Inc. Viewing and navigating within panoramic images, and applications thereof
US9037599B1 (en) 2007-05-29 2015-05-19 Google Inc. Registering photos in a geographic information system, and applications thereof
US20090094188A1 (en) * 2007-10-03 2009-04-09 Edward Covannon Facilitating identification of an object recorded in digital content records
US20090167786A1 (en) * 2007-12-24 2009-07-02 Ronald Stanions Methods and apparatus for associating image data
US7961224B2 (en) * 2008-01-25 2011-06-14 Peter N. Cheimets Photon counting imaging system
US20090196459A1 (en) * 2008-02-01 2009-08-06 Perceptron, Inc. Image manipulation and processing techniques for remote inspection device
US7697126B2 (en) * 2008-04-02 2010-04-13 Spatial Integrated Systems, Inc. Three dimensional spatial imaging system and method
US8100010B2 (en) * 2008-04-14 2012-01-24 Honeywell International Inc. Method and system for forming an electronic assembly having inertial sensors mounted thereto
US20090289937A1 (en) * 2008-05-22 2009-11-26 Microsoft Corporation Multi-scale navigational visualtization
KR20090123227A (en) * 2008-05-27 2009-12-02 삼성전자주식회사 Offering apparatus of searching service, method and program thereof
US8682736B2 (en) * 2008-06-24 2014-03-25 Microsoft Corporation Collection represents combined intent
JP5262546B2 (en) * 2008-10-08 2013-08-14 ソニー株式会社 Video signal processing system, playback device and display device, and video signal processing method
US8115427B2 (en) 2008-10-23 2012-02-14 Won-Door Corporation Methods, systems, and devices for a motor control system
US8761434B2 (en) * 2008-12-17 2014-06-24 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Tracking system calibration by reconciling inertial data with computed acceleration of a tracked object in the three-dimensional coordinate system
US8624962B2 (en) * 2009-02-02 2014-01-07 Ydreams—Informatica, S.A. Ydreams Systems and methods for simulating three-dimensional virtual interactions from two-dimensional camera images
JP5347144B2 (en) * 2009-02-03 2013-11-20 リコーイメージング株式会社 Camera capable of fixed point shooting
US20100235078A1 (en) * 2009-03-12 2010-09-16 Microsoft Corporation Driving directions with maps and videos
US9477368B1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2016-10-25 Google Inc. System and method of indicating the distance or the surface of an image of a geographical object
US20100250120A1 (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-09-30 Microsoft Corporation Managing storage and delivery of navigation images
US9299184B2 (en) * 2009-04-07 2016-03-29 Sony Computer Entertainment America Llc Simulating performance of virtual camera
KR101128913B1 (en) * 2009-05-07 2012-03-27 에스엔유 프리시젼 주식회사 Vision inspection system and method for converting coordinates using the same
US8577518B2 (en) * 2009-05-27 2013-11-05 American Aerospace Advisors, Inc. Airborne right of way autonomous imager
US10775960B2 (en) 2009-06-03 2020-09-15 Savant Systems, Inc. User generated virtual room-based user interface
NZ596852A (en) * 2009-06-03 2013-03-28 Savant Systems Llc Virtual room-based light fixture and device control
US10613704B2 (en) 2009-06-03 2020-04-07 Savant Systems, Llc Small screen virtual room-based user interface
US9298345B2 (en) 2009-06-23 2016-03-29 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Block view for geographic navigation
US8933960B2 (en) * 2009-08-14 2015-01-13 Apple Inc. Image alteration techniques
US20110099507A1 (en) 2009-10-28 2011-04-28 Google Inc. Displaying a collection of interactive elements that trigger actions directed to an item
US8264553B2 (en) * 2009-11-12 2012-09-11 Microsoft Corporation Hardware assisted image deblurring
US20110128350A1 (en) * 2009-11-30 2011-06-02 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for choosing a desired field of view from a wide-angle image or video
JP2011199750A (en) * 2010-03-23 2011-10-06 Olympus Corp Image capturing terminal, external terminal, image capturing system, and image capturing method
JP2011247860A (en) * 2010-05-31 2011-12-08 Denso Corp Navigation apparatus
US9373186B2 (en) * 2010-06-14 2016-06-21 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Device and method utilizing animated frames to dynamically create snapshots for selectable menus
JP2012068380A (en) * 2010-09-22 2012-04-05 Sony Corp Image processor, imaging apparatus, image processing method, and program
US9466127B2 (en) 2010-09-30 2016-10-11 Apple Inc. Image alteration techniques
US9552376B2 (en) 2011-06-09 2017-01-24 MemoryWeb, LLC Method and apparatus for managing digital files
US8657200B2 (en) 2011-06-20 2014-02-25 Metrologic Instruments, Inc. Indicia reading terminal with color frame processing
US9124797B2 (en) 2011-06-28 2015-09-01 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Image enhancement via lens simulation
US9336240B2 (en) * 2011-07-15 2016-05-10 Apple Inc. Geo-tagging digital images
US20130089301A1 (en) * 2011-10-06 2013-04-11 Chi-cheng Ju Method and apparatus for processing video frames image with image registration information involved therein
JP2013105346A (en) * 2011-11-14 2013-05-30 Sony Corp Information presentation device, information presentation method, information presentation system, information registration device, information registration method, information registration system, and program
CN104126197B (en) * 2011-12-27 2018-04-27 索尼公司 Information processing equipment and information processing method
US9137526B2 (en) 2012-05-07 2015-09-15 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Image enhancement via calibrated lens simulation
JP2014092531A (en) * 2012-11-07 2014-05-19 Seiko Epson Corp Physical quantity detection device, electronic equipment and mobile body
US9049371B2 (en) 2013-01-17 2015-06-02 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Method and apparatus for operating a camera
US9074892B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-07-07 Ian Michael Fink System and method of determining a position of a remote object
US9762848B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-09-12 Google Inc. Automatic adjustment of video orientation
US9563105B1 (en) * 2013-04-10 2017-02-07 Ic Real Tech Inc. Screw coupler enabling direct secure fastening between communicating electronic components
WO2014181324A1 (en) 2013-05-05 2014-11-13 Trax Technology Solutions Pte Ltd. System and method of monitoring retail units
JP2015100047A (en) * 2013-11-19 2015-05-28 ソニー株式会社 Camera apparatus and method of generating image signal for view finder
US20150187101A1 (en) * 2013-12-30 2015-07-02 Trax Technology Solutions Pte Ltd. Device and method with orientation indication
WO2015114621A1 (en) 2014-02-02 2015-08-06 Trax Technology Solutions Pte. Ltd. System and method for panoramic image processing
US9972121B2 (en) * 2014-04-22 2018-05-15 Google Llc Selecting time-distributed panoramic images for display
US10402777B2 (en) 2014-06-18 2019-09-03 Trax Technology Solutions Pte Ltd. Method and a system for object recognition
US9638538B2 (en) 2014-10-14 2017-05-02 Uber Technologies, Inc. Street-level guidance via route path
EP3400537B8 (en) 2016-01-04 2022-07-20 Meta Platforms, Inc. Method for navigating through a set of images
JP2017126935A (en) * 2016-01-15 2017-07-20 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing system, and information processing method and program
US9538061B1 (en) * 2016-01-15 2017-01-03 Alexandru Gheorghe Serban Method and program product for controlling a real time filming of a remote location
KR20170105334A (en) * 2016-03-09 2017-09-19 엘지전자 주식회사 Camera module
JP7065836B6 (en) 2016-09-29 2022-06-06 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ Image processing
US10847073B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2020-11-24 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Image display optimization method and apparatus
US10362228B2 (en) * 2016-10-22 2019-07-23 Gopro, Inc. Fast attitude error correction
US20200068140A1 (en) * 2016-10-25 2020-02-27 Benjamin Ee Pao WUNG Neutral environment recording device
US10375306B2 (en) * 2017-07-13 2019-08-06 Zillow Group, Inc. Capture and use of building interior data from mobile devices
US10536646B2 (en) * 2017-07-28 2020-01-14 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America Imaging control device and imaging control method
AU2020346889A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2022-03-31 Savant Systems, Inc. Three dimensional virtual room-based user interface for a home automation system
US20210183138A1 (en) * 2019-12-13 2021-06-17 Sony Corporation Rendering back plates
US11610363B2 (en) * 2020-12-31 2023-03-21 Oberon Technologies, Inc. Systems and methods for virtual reality environments

Citations (143)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3363332A (en) 1966-01-20 1968-01-16 Redifon Air Trainers Ltd Visual flight simulating systems
US3580996A (en) 1968-10-17 1971-05-25 Edward Stanton Maxey Video landing and departure system
US4023202A (en) 1975-12-24 1977-05-10 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Television tracking symbol generator
US4084184A (en) 1976-07-26 1978-04-11 Crain David W Tv object locator and image identifier
US4169666A (en) 1978-01-23 1979-10-02 Magicam, Inc. Foreground stabilization system for use in composite photography
US4179823A (en) 1978-01-13 1979-12-25 The Singer Company Real-time simulation of a polygon face object system as viewed by a moving observer
US4283766A (en) 1979-09-24 1981-08-11 Walt Disney Productions Automatic camera control for creating special effects in motion picture photography
US4343037A (en) 1979-06-15 1982-08-03 Redifon Simulation Limited Visual display systems of the computer generated image type
US4373169A (en) 1979-10-30 1983-02-08 The Boeing Company Multi-window visual display system for flight simulators
US4449198A (en) 1979-11-21 1984-05-15 U.S. Philips Corporation Device for interactive video playback
US4463380A (en) 1981-09-25 1984-07-31 Vought Corporation Image processing system
US4484192A (en) 1981-12-17 1984-11-20 The Bendix Corporation Moving map display
US4486775A (en) 1980-10-17 1984-12-04 Micro Consultants Limited Object recognition
US4488249A (en) 1982-02-04 1984-12-11 Martin Marietta Corporation Alignment error calibrator and compensator
US4495580A (en) 1981-03-30 1985-01-22 E-Systems, Inc. Navigation system
US4561063A (en) 1982-02-09 1985-12-24 Barr & Stroud Limited Apparatus for identifying the position of a body
US4628453A (en) 1983-10-17 1986-12-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Navigation apparatus for mobile system
US4645459A (en) 1982-07-30 1987-02-24 Honeywell Inc. Computer generated synthesized imagery
US4682160A (en) 1983-07-25 1987-07-21 Harris Corporation Real time perspective display employing digital map generator
US4687326A (en) 1985-11-12 1987-08-18 General Electric Company Integrated range and luminance camera
US4737921A (en) 1985-06-03 1988-04-12 Dynamic Digital Displays, Inc. Three dimensional medical image display system
US4751507A (en) 1984-07-23 1988-06-14 International Business Machines Corporation Method for simultaneously displaying an image and an enlarged view of a selectable portion of the image with different levels of dot detail resolution
US4752836A (en) 1984-09-07 1988-06-21 Ivex Corporation Method and apparatus for reproducing video images to simulate movement within a multi-dimensional space
US4766541A (en) 1984-10-24 1988-08-23 Williams Electronics Games, Inc. Apparatus for generating interactive video game playfield environments
JPS63164782U (en) 1987-04-15 1988-10-27
US4791572A (en) 1985-11-20 1988-12-13 Mets, Inc. Method for accurately displaying positional information on a map
US4807158A (en) 1986-09-30 1989-02-21 Daleco/Ivex Partners, Ltd. Method and apparatus for sampling images to simulate movement within a multidimensional space
US4829304A (en) 1986-05-20 1989-05-09 Harris Corp. Map-aided navigation system employing TERCOM-SITAN signal processing
US4855820A (en) 1987-10-05 1989-08-08 Joel Barbour Down hole video tool apparatus and method for visual well bore recording
US4855822A (en) 1988-01-26 1989-08-08 Honeywell, Inc. Human engineered remote driving system
US4857902A (en) 1987-05-14 1989-08-15 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Position-dependent interactivity system for image display
US4876651A (en) 1988-05-11 1989-10-24 Honeywell Inc. Digital map system
US4891761A (en) 1988-03-31 1990-01-02 Mets, Inc. Method for accurately updating positional information provided on a digital map
US4910674A (en) 1984-07-21 1990-03-20 Mbb Gmbh Navigation of aircraft by correlation
US4939663A (en) 1988-04-04 1990-07-03 Harris Corporation Elevation map-referenced mechanism for updating vehicle navigation system estimates
US4939662A (en) 1987-07-10 1990-07-03 Aisin Aw Co., Ltd. Navigation apparatus
US4969036A (en) 1989-03-31 1990-11-06 Bir Bhanu System for computing the self-motion of moving images devices
US4972319A (en) 1987-09-25 1990-11-20 Delorme David M Electronic global map generating system
WO1990016131A1 (en) 1989-06-15 1990-12-27 Spaceward Limited Digital video recording
US4984179A (en) 1987-01-21 1991-01-08 W. Industries Limited Method and apparatus for the perception of computer-generated imagery
US4989151A (en) 1988-02-23 1991-01-29 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Navigation apparatus and matching method for navigation
US4992866A (en) 1989-06-29 1991-02-12 Morgan Jack B Camera selection and positioning system and method
US4994971A (en) 1985-12-06 1991-02-19 Poelstra Theo J System for setting up and keeping up-to-date datafiles for road traffic
US5016007A (en) 1985-04-19 1991-05-14 Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus for displaying travel path
US5023798A (en) 1987-06-06 1991-06-11 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method of and apparatus for determining a position of a land vehicle
US5023725A (en) 1989-10-23 1991-06-11 Mccutchen David Method and apparatus for dodecahedral imaging system
US5049988A (en) 1988-02-12 1991-09-17 Pearpoint Limited Scanning T.V. camera
US5060162A (en) 1988-12-09 1991-10-22 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Vehicle in-situ locating apparatus
JPH0372309B2 (en) 1980-04-15 1991-11-18 Yunichika Kk
US5072396A (en) 1989-11-08 1991-12-10 Smiths Industries Public Limited Company Navigation systems
US5073819A (en) 1990-04-05 1991-12-17 Computer Scaled Video Surveys, Inc. Computer assisted video surveying and method thereof
US5075861A (en) 1988-07-18 1991-12-24 Israel Aircraft Industries Ltd. Integrated stabilized optical and navigation system
US5086396A (en) 1989-02-02 1992-02-04 Honeywell Inc. Apparatus and method for an aircraft navigation system having improved mission management and survivability capabilities
US5089816A (en) 1989-10-16 1992-02-18 Holmes Lawrence Jr Chart instrument for displaying real time vehicle position relative to information on charts
US5115398A (en) 1989-07-04 1992-05-19 U.S. Philips Corp. Method of displaying navigation data for a vehicle in an image of the vehicle environment, a navigation system for performing the method, and a vehicle comprising a navigation system
US5123088A (en) 1988-06-27 1992-06-16 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corp. Method and apparatus for creating and displaying navigators for guiding to related image information
US5124938A (en) 1990-07-23 1992-06-23 Recon/Optical, Inc. Gyroless platform stabilization techniques
US5128874A (en) 1990-01-02 1992-07-07 Honeywell Inc. Inertial navigation sensor integrated obstacle detection system
US5133050A (en) 1988-10-24 1992-07-21 Carleton University Telescope operating system
CA2058877A1 (en) 1991-02-07 1992-08-08 Gerald W. Plunk Automated video imagery database generation using photogrammetry
US5146212A (en) 1990-01-04 1992-09-08 Apple Computer, Inc. Manipulatable orientation for a translatable graphic object
US5155683A (en) 1991-04-11 1992-10-13 Wadiatur Rahim Vehicle remote guidance with path control
US5166878A (en) 1989-04-07 1992-11-24 Poelstra Theo J Method and apparatus of computer aided surveying for obtaining digital, 3d topographic information
US5177685A (en) 1990-08-09 1993-01-05 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Automobile navigation system using real time spoken driving instructions
US5182641A (en) 1991-06-17 1993-01-26 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Composite video and graphics display for camera viewing systems in robotics and teleoperation
US5187571A (en) 1991-02-01 1993-02-16 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Television system for displaying multiple views of a remote location
WO1993000647A3 (en) 1991-06-21 1993-02-18 Unitech Research Inc Real time three dimensional geo-referenced digital orthophotograph-based positioning, navigation, collision avoidance and decision support system
US5189402A (en) 1987-05-14 1993-02-23 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Content addressable video system for image display
US5214757A (en) 1990-08-07 1993-05-25 Georesearch, Inc. Interactive automated mapping system
US5214615A (en) 1990-02-26 1993-05-25 Will Bauer Three-dimensional displacement of a body with computer interface
US5227985A (en) 1991-08-19 1993-07-13 University Of Maryland Computer vision system for position monitoring in three dimensions using non-coplanar light sources attached to a monitored object
US5262867A (en) 1990-06-20 1993-11-16 Sony Corporation Electronic camera and device for panoramic imaging and object searching
US5265025A (en) 1990-07-11 1993-11-23 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Navigation system using satellite signals
US5267042A (en) 1991-01-11 1993-11-30 Pioneer Electronic Corporation Image pickup device for automatically recording the location where an image is recorded
US5268998A (en) 1990-11-27 1993-12-07 Paraspectives, Inc. System for imaging objects in alternative geometries
US5270694A (en) 1987-05-14 1993-12-14 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Content addressable video system for image display
US5274387A (en) 1990-06-06 1993-12-28 Mazda Motor Corporation Navigation apparatus for vehicles
US5299300A (en) 1990-02-22 1994-03-29 Harris Corporation Interpolation processing of digital map imagery data
US5322441A (en) 1990-10-05 1994-06-21 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and apparatus for providing a portable visual display
US5325472A (en) 1990-04-13 1994-06-28 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image displaying system for interactively changing the positions of a view vector and a viewpoint in a 3-dimensional space
US5327233A (en) 1990-12-15 1994-07-05 Samsung Electronics, Ltd. Movable security camera apparatus
US5335072A (en) 1990-05-30 1994-08-02 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Photographic system capable of storing information on photographed image data
US5384588A (en) 1991-05-13 1995-01-24 Telerobotics International, Inc. System for omindirectional image viewing at a remote location without the transmission of control signals to select viewing parameters
US5388990A (en) 1993-04-23 1995-02-14 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Virtual reality flight control display with six-degree-of-freedom controller and spherical orientation overlay
US5392225A (en) 1992-10-20 1995-02-21 E-Sytems, Inc. Method and apparatus for correlating target data
US5396583A (en) 1992-10-13 1995-03-07 Apple Computer, Inc. Cylindrical to planar image mapping using scanline coherence
US5490075A (en) 1994-08-01 1996-02-06 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Global positioning system synchronized active light autonomous docking system
US5495576A (en) 1993-01-11 1996-02-27 Ritchey; Kurtis J. Panoramic image based virtual reality/telepresence audio-visual system and method
US5512941A (en) 1991-03-04 1996-04-30 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image sensing apparatus
US5523783A (en) 1992-10-19 1996-06-04 Fuji Photo Optical Co., Ltd. Pan head control system for TV camera
US5530650A (en) 1992-10-28 1996-06-25 Mcdonnell Douglas Corp. Computer imaging system and method for remote in-flight aircraft refueling
US5555018A (en) 1991-04-25 1996-09-10 Von Braun; Heiko S. Large-scale mapping of parameters of multi-dimensional structures in natural environments
US5559707A (en) 1994-06-24 1996-09-24 Delorme Publishing Company Computer aided routing system
US5563650A (en) 1992-11-24 1996-10-08 Geeris Holding Nederland B.V. Method and device for producing panoramic images, and a method and device for consulting panoramic images
US5568152A (en) 1994-02-04 1996-10-22 Trimble Navigation Limited Integrated image transfer for remote target location
US5598209A (en) * 1993-10-20 1997-01-28 Videoconferencing Systems, Inc. Method for automatically adjusting a video conferencing system camera
US5600368A (en) 1994-11-09 1997-02-04 Microsoft Corporation Interactive television system and method for viewer control of multiple camera viewpoints in broadcast programming
US5601353A (en) 1995-12-20 1997-02-11 Interval Research Corporation Panoramic display with stationary display device and rotating support structure
US5602564A (en) * 1991-11-14 1997-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Graphic data processing system
US5633946A (en) 1994-05-19 1997-05-27 Geospan Corporation Method and apparatus for collecting and processing visual and spatial position information from a moving platform
US5636036A (en) 1987-02-27 1997-06-03 Ashbey; James A. Interactive video system having frame recall dependent upon user input and current displayed image
US5642285A (en) 1995-01-31 1997-06-24 Trimble Navigation Limited Outdoor movie camera GPS-position and time code data-logging for special effects production
US5644694A (en) 1994-12-14 1997-07-01 Cyberflix Inc. Apparatus and method for digital movie production
US5645077A (en) 1994-06-16 1997-07-08 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Inertial orientation tracker apparatus having automatic drift compensation for tracking human head and other similarly sized body
US5682332A (en) 1993-09-10 1997-10-28 Criticom Corporation Vision imaging devices and methods exploiting position and attitude
US5684943A (en) 1990-11-30 1997-11-04 Vpl Research, Inc. Method and apparatus for creating virtual worlds
US5689611A (en) 1992-10-09 1997-11-18 Sony Corporation Panorama image producing method and apparatus
US5703604A (en) 1995-05-22 1997-12-30 Dodeca Llc Immersive dodecaherdral video viewing system
US5729471A (en) 1995-03-31 1998-03-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Machine dynamic selection of one video camera/image of a scene from multiple video cameras/images of the scene in accordance with a particular perspective on the scene, an object in the scene, or an event in the scene
US5739848A (en) 1993-09-08 1998-04-14 Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. Object recognition apparatus and method
US5751578A (en) 1995-05-16 1998-05-12 Recon/Optical, Inc. Platform attitude measurement system
US5764276A (en) 1991-05-13 1998-06-09 Interactive Pictures Corporation Method and apparatus for providing perceived video viewing experiences using still images
US5768640A (en) 1995-10-27 1998-06-16 Konica Corporation Camera having an information recording function
US5793367A (en) 1993-01-07 1998-08-11 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus and method for displaying both an image and control information related to the image
US5794216A (en) 1995-07-14 1998-08-11 Brown; Timothy Robert Methods and system for data acquisition in a multimedia real estate database
US5838906A (en) * 1994-10-17 1998-11-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Distributed hypermedia method for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US5850352A (en) 1995-03-31 1998-12-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Immersive video, including video hypermosaicing to generate from multiple video views of a scene a three-dimensional video mosaic from which diverse virtual video scene images are synthesized, including panoramic, scene interactive and stereoscopic images
US5854843A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-12-29 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force Virtual navigator, and inertial angular measurement system
US5881321A (en) 1997-05-09 1999-03-09 Cammotion, Inc.. Camera motion sensing system
US5897223A (en) 1997-11-17 1999-04-27 Wescam Inc. Stabilized platform system for camera
US5913078A (en) 1994-11-01 1999-06-15 Konica Corporation Camera utilizing a satellite positioning system
US5937096A (en) 1994-11-30 1999-08-10 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Motion image processing apparatus and method
US6006126A (en) 1991-01-28 1999-12-21 Cosman; Eric R. System and method for stereotactic registration of image scan data
US6011585A (en) 1996-01-19 2000-01-04 Apple Computer, Inc. Apparatus and method for rotating the display orientation of a captured image
US6037936A (en) 1993-09-10 2000-03-14 Criticom Corp. Computer vision system with a graphic user interface and remote camera control
US6040824A (en) * 1996-07-31 2000-03-21 Aisin Aw Co., Ltd. Information display system with touch panel
US6064355A (en) 1994-05-24 2000-05-16 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and apparatus for playback with a virtual reality system
US6133947A (en) 1995-11-15 2000-10-17 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Image processing system capable of displaying photographed image in combination with relevant map image
US6141034A (en) 1995-12-15 2000-10-31 Immersive Media Co. Immersive imaging method and apparatus
US6195122B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2001-02-27 Robert Vincent Spatial referenced photography
US6233004B1 (en) 1994-04-19 2001-05-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing method and apparatus
US6282362B1 (en) 1995-11-07 2001-08-28 Trimble Navigation Limited Geographical position/image digital recording and display system
US20010026318A1 (en) 1995-12-19 2001-10-04 Hiroki Yonezawa Communication apparatus, image processing apparatus, communication method, and image processing method
US20020067412A1 (en) 1994-11-28 2002-06-06 Tomoaki Kawai Camera controller
US6449011B1 (en) 1992-03-27 2002-09-10 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Video camera system having panhead for use in video conference or the like
JP2004173083A (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-17 Atsushi Matsushita Method and device for simultaneously storing/reproducing a plurality of pictures
US6768563B1 (en) 1995-02-24 2004-07-27 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image input system
JP4336091B2 (en) 2001-10-09 2009-09-30 古河電気工業株式会社 Optical module, optical transmitter, and WDM optical transmitter
US20100250120A1 (en) 2009-03-31 2010-09-30 Microsoft Corporation Managing storage and delivery of navigation images
US20100302280A1 (en) 2009-06-02 2010-12-02 Microsoft Corporation Rendering aligned perspective images
US7849393B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2010-12-07 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book connection to world watch live
US20100325589A1 (en) 2009-06-23 2010-12-23 Microsoft Corporation Block view for geographic navigation
JP5048964B2 (en) 2006-04-11 2012-10-17 積水化学工業株式会社 Surface protection film

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5879223A (en) * 1997-06-02 1999-03-09 Aga Ab Shot blaster with impeller/blower

Patent Citations (150)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3363332A (en) 1966-01-20 1968-01-16 Redifon Air Trainers Ltd Visual flight simulating systems
US3580996A (en) 1968-10-17 1971-05-25 Edward Stanton Maxey Video landing and departure system
US4023202A (en) 1975-12-24 1977-05-10 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Television tracking symbol generator
US4084184A (en) 1976-07-26 1978-04-11 Crain David W Tv object locator and image identifier
US4179823A (en) 1978-01-13 1979-12-25 The Singer Company Real-time simulation of a polygon face object system as viewed by a moving observer
US4169666A (en) 1978-01-23 1979-10-02 Magicam, Inc. Foreground stabilization system for use in composite photography
US4343037A (en) 1979-06-15 1982-08-03 Redifon Simulation Limited Visual display systems of the computer generated image type
US4283766A (en) 1979-09-24 1981-08-11 Walt Disney Productions Automatic camera control for creating special effects in motion picture photography
US4373169A (en) 1979-10-30 1983-02-08 The Boeing Company Multi-window visual display system for flight simulators
US4449198A (en) 1979-11-21 1984-05-15 U.S. Philips Corporation Device for interactive video playback
JPH0372309B2 (en) 1980-04-15 1991-11-18 Yunichika Kk
US4486775A (en) 1980-10-17 1984-12-04 Micro Consultants Limited Object recognition
US4495580A (en) 1981-03-30 1985-01-22 E-Systems, Inc. Navigation system
US4463380A (en) 1981-09-25 1984-07-31 Vought Corporation Image processing system
US4484192A (en) 1981-12-17 1984-11-20 The Bendix Corporation Moving map display
US4488249A (en) 1982-02-04 1984-12-11 Martin Marietta Corporation Alignment error calibrator and compensator
US4561063A (en) 1982-02-09 1985-12-24 Barr & Stroud Limited Apparatus for identifying the position of a body
US4645459A (en) 1982-07-30 1987-02-24 Honeywell Inc. Computer generated synthesized imagery
US4682160A (en) 1983-07-25 1987-07-21 Harris Corporation Real time perspective display employing digital map generator
US4628453A (en) 1983-10-17 1986-12-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Navigation apparatus for mobile system
US4910674A (en) 1984-07-21 1990-03-20 Mbb Gmbh Navigation of aircraft by correlation
US4751507A (en) 1984-07-23 1988-06-14 International Business Machines Corporation Method for simultaneously displaying an image and an enlarged view of a selectable portion of the image with different levels of dot detail resolution
US4752836A (en) 1984-09-07 1988-06-21 Ivex Corporation Method and apparatus for reproducing video images to simulate movement within a multi-dimensional space
US4766541A (en) 1984-10-24 1988-08-23 Williams Electronics Games, Inc. Apparatus for generating interactive video game playfield environments
US5016007A (en) 1985-04-19 1991-05-14 Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus for displaying travel path
US4737921A (en) 1985-06-03 1988-04-12 Dynamic Digital Displays, Inc. Three dimensional medical image display system
US4687326A (en) 1985-11-12 1987-08-18 General Electric Company Integrated range and luminance camera
US4791572A (en) 1985-11-20 1988-12-13 Mets, Inc. Method for accurately displaying positional information on a map
US4994971A (en) 1985-12-06 1991-02-19 Poelstra Theo J System for setting up and keeping up-to-date datafiles for road traffic
US4829304A (en) 1986-05-20 1989-05-09 Harris Corp. Map-aided navigation system employing TERCOM-SITAN signal processing
US4807158A (en) 1986-09-30 1989-02-21 Daleco/Ivex Partners, Ltd. Method and apparatus for sampling images to simulate movement within a multidimensional space
US4984179A (en) 1987-01-21 1991-01-08 W. Industries Limited Method and apparatus for the perception of computer-generated imagery
US5636036A (en) 1987-02-27 1997-06-03 Ashbey; James A. Interactive video system having frame recall dependent upon user input and current displayed image
JPS63164782U (en) 1987-04-15 1988-10-27
US5189402A (en) 1987-05-14 1993-02-23 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Content addressable video system for image display
US4857902A (en) 1987-05-14 1989-08-15 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Position-dependent interactivity system for image display
US5270694A (en) 1987-05-14 1993-12-14 Advanced Interaction, Inc. Content addressable video system for image display
US5023798A (en) 1987-06-06 1991-06-11 Robert Bosch Gmbh Method of and apparatus for determining a position of a land vehicle
US4939662A (en) 1987-07-10 1990-07-03 Aisin Aw Co., Ltd. Navigation apparatus
US4972319A (en) 1987-09-25 1990-11-20 Delorme David M Electronic global map generating system
US4855820A (en) 1987-10-05 1989-08-08 Joel Barbour Down hole video tool apparatus and method for visual well bore recording
US4855822A (en) 1988-01-26 1989-08-08 Honeywell, Inc. Human engineered remote driving system
US5049988A (en) 1988-02-12 1991-09-17 Pearpoint Limited Scanning T.V. camera
US4989151A (en) 1988-02-23 1991-01-29 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Navigation apparatus and matching method for navigation
US4891761A (en) 1988-03-31 1990-01-02 Mets, Inc. Method for accurately updating positional information provided on a digital map
US4939663A (en) 1988-04-04 1990-07-03 Harris Corporation Elevation map-referenced mechanism for updating vehicle navigation system estimates
US4876651A (en) 1988-05-11 1989-10-24 Honeywell Inc. Digital map system
US5123088A (en) 1988-06-27 1992-06-16 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corp. Method and apparatus for creating and displaying navigators for guiding to related image information
US5075861A (en) 1988-07-18 1991-12-24 Israel Aircraft Industries Ltd. Integrated stabilized optical and navigation system
US5133050A (en) 1988-10-24 1992-07-21 Carleton University Telescope operating system
US5060162A (en) 1988-12-09 1991-10-22 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Vehicle in-situ locating apparatus
US5086396A (en) 1989-02-02 1992-02-04 Honeywell Inc. Apparatus and method for an aircraft navigation system having improved mission management and survivability capabilities
US4969036A (en) 1989-03-31 1990-11-06 Bir Bhanu System for computing the self-motion of moving images devices
US5166878A (en) 1989-04-07 1992-11-24 Poelstra Theo J Method and apparatus of computer aided surveying for obtaining digital, 3d topographic information
WO1990016131A1 (en) 1989-06-15 1990-12-27 Spaceward Limited Digital video recording
US4992866A (en) 1989-06-29 1991-02-12 Morgan Jack B Camera selection and positioning system and method
US5115398A (en) 1989-07-04 1992-05-19 U.S. Philips Corp. Method of displaying navigation data for a vehicle in an image of the vehicle environment, a navigation system for performing the method, and a vehicle comprising a navigation system
US5089816A (en) 1989-10-16 1992-02-18 Holmes Lawrence Jr Chart instrument for displaying real time vehicle position relative to information on charts
US5023725A (en) 1989-10-23 1991-06-11 Mccutchen David Method and apparatus for dodecahedral imaging system
US5072396A (en) 1989-11-08 1991-12-10 Smiths Industries Public Limited Company Navigation systems
US5128874A (en) 1990-01-02 1992-07-07 Honeywell Inc. Inertial navigation sensor integrated obstacle detection system
US5146212A (en) 1990-01-04 1992-09-08 Apple Computer, Inc. Manipulatable orientation for a translatable graphic object
US5299300A (en) 1990-02-22 1994-03-29 Harris Corporation Interpolation processing of digital map imagery data
US5214615A (en) 1990-02-26 1993-05-25 Will Bauer Three-dimensional displacement of a body with computer interface
US5073819A (en) 1990-04-05 1991-12-17 Computer Scaled Video Surveys, Inc. Computer assisted video surveying and method thereof
US5325472A (en) 1990-04-13 1994-06-28 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Image displaying system for interactively changing the positions of a view vector and a viewpoint in a 3-dimensional space
US5335072A (en) 1990-05-30 1994-08-02 Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Photographic system capable of storing information on photographed image data
US5274387A (en) 1990-06-06 1993-12-28 Mazda Motor Corporation Navigation apparatus for vehicles
US5262867A (en) 1990-06-20 1993-11-16 Sony Corporation Electronic camera and device for panoramic imaging and object searching
US5265025A (en) 1990-07-11 1993-11-23 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Navigation system using satellite signals
US5124938A (en) 1990-07-23 1992-06-23 Recon/Optical, Inc. Gyroless platform stabilization techniques
US5214757A (en) 1990-08-07 1993-05-25 Georesearch, Inc. Interactive automated mapping system
US5177685A (en) 1990-08-09 1993-01-05 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Automobile navigation system using real time spoken driving instructions
US5322441A (en) 1990-10-05 1994-06-21 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and apparatus for providing a portable visual display
US5268998A (en) 1990-11-27 1993-12-07 Paraspectives, Inc. System for imaging objects in alternative geometries
US5684943A (en) 1990-11-30 1997-11-04 Vpl Research, Inc. Method and apparatus for creating virtual worlds
US5327233A (en) 1990-12-15 1994-07-05 Samsung Electronics, Ltd. Movable security camera apparatus
US5267042A (en) 1991-01-11 1993-11-30 Pioneer Electronic Corporation Image pickup device for automatically recording the location where an image is recorded
US6006126A (en) 1991-01-28 1999-12-21 Cosman; Eric R. System and method for stereotactic registration of image scan data
US5187571A (en) 1991-02-01 1993-02-16 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Television system for displaying multiple views of a remote location
US5259037A (en) 1991-02-07 1993-11-02 Hughes Training, Inc. Automated video imagery database generation using photogrammetry
CA2058877A1 (en) 1991-02-07 1992-08-08 Gerald W. Plunk Automated video imagery database generation using photogrammetry
US5512941A (en) 1991-03-04 1996-04-30 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image sensing apparatus
US5155683A (en) 1991-04-11 1992-10-13 Wadiatur Rahim Vehicle remote guidance with path control
US5555018A (en) 1991-04-25 1996-09-10 Von Braun; Heiko S. Large-scale mapping of parameters of multi-dimensional structures in natural environments
US5384588A (en) 1991-05-13 1995-01-24 Telerobotics International, Inc. System for omindirectional image viewing at a remote location without the transmission of control signals to select viewing parameters
US5764276A (en) 1991-05-13 1998-06-09 Interactive Pictures Corporation Method and apparatus for providing perceived video viewing experiences using still images
US5182641A (en) 1991-06-17 1993-01-26 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Composite video and graphics display for camera viewing systems in robotics and teleoperation
WO1993000647A3 (en) 1991-06-21 1993-02-18 Unitech Research Inc Real time three dimensional geo-referenced digital orthophotograph-based positioning, navigation, collision avoidance and decision support system
US5381338A (en) 1991-06-21 1995-01-10 Wysocki; David A. Real time three dimensional geo-referenced digital orthophotograph-based positioning, navigation, collision avoidance and decision support system
US5227985A (en) 1991-08-19 1993-07-13 University Of Maryland Computer vision system for position monitoring in three dimensions using non-coplanar light sources attached to a monitored object
US5602564A (en) * 1991-11-14 1997-02-11 Hitachi, Ltd. Graphic data processing system
US6449011B1 (en) 1992-03-27 2002-09-10 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Video camera system having panhead for use in video conference or the like
US5689611A (en) 1992-10-09 1997-11-18 Sony Corporation Panorama image producing method and apparatus
US5396583A (en) 1992-10-13 1995-03-07 Apple Computer, Inc. Cylindrical to planar image mapping using scanline coherence
US5523783A (en) 1992-10-19 1996-06-04 Fuji Photo Optical Co., Ltd. Pan head control system for TV camera
US5392225A (en) 1992-10-20 1995-02-21 E-Sytems, Inc. Method and apparatus for correlating target data
US5530650A (en) 1992-10-28 1996-06-25 Mcdonnell Douglas Corp. Computer imaging system and method for remote in-flight aircraft refueling
US5563650A (en) 1992-11-24 1996-10-08 Geeris Holding Nederland B.V. Method and device for producing panoramic images, and a method and device for consulting panoramic images
US7849393B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2010-12-07 Discovery Communications, Inc. Electronic book connection to world watch live
US5793367A (en) 1993-01-07 1998-08-11 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus and method for displaying both an image and control information related to the image
US5495576A (en) 1993-01-11 1996-02-27 Ritchey; Kurtis J. Panoramic image based virtual reality/telepresence audio-visual system and method
US5388990A (en) 1993-04-23 1995-02-14 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Virtual reality flight control display with six-degree-of-freedom controller and spherical orientation overlay
US5739848A (en) 1993-09-08 1998-04-14 Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. Object recognition apparatus and method
US6037936A (en) 1993-09-10 2000-03-14 Criticom Corp. Computer vision system with a graphic user interface and remote camera control
US5682332A (en) 1993-09-10 1997-10-28 Criticom Corporation Vision imaging devices and methods exploiting position and attitude
US5815411A (en) 1993-09-10 1998-09-29 Criticom Corporation Electro-optic vision system which exploits position and attitude
US5598209A (en) * 1993-10-20 1997-01-28 Videoconferencing Systems, Inc. Method for automatically adjusting a video conferencing system camera
US5568152A (en) 1994-02-04 1996-10-22 Trimble Navigation Limited Integrated image transfer for remote target location
US6233004B1 (en) 1994-04-19 2001-05-15 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image processing method and apparatus
US5633946A (en) 1994-05-19 1997-05-27 Geospan Corporation Method and apparatus for collecting and processing visual and spatial position information from a moving platform
US6064355A (en) 1994-05-24 2000-05-16 Texas Instruments Incorporated Method and apparatus for playback with a virtual reality system
US5645077A (en) 1994-06-16 1997-07-08 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Inertial orientation tracker apparatus having automatic drift compensation for tracking human head and other similarly sized body
US5559707A (en) 1994-06-24 1996-09-24 Delorme Publishing Company Computer aided routing system
US5490075A (en) 1994-08-01 1996-02-06 The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration Global positioning system synchronized active light autonomous docking system
US5838906A (en) * 1994-10-17 1998-11-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Distributed hypermedia method for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US5913078A (en) 1994-11-01 1999-06-15 Konica Corporation Camera utilizing a satellite positioning system
US5600368A (en) 1994-11-09 1997-02-04 Microsoft Corporation Interactive television system and method for viewer control of multiple camera viewpoints in broadcast programming
US20020067412A1 (en) 1994-11-28 2002-06-06 Tomoaki Kawai Camera controller
US6680746B2 (en) 1994-11-28 2004-01-20 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus and method for controlling configuration of video camera
US5937096A (en) 1994-11-30 1999-08-10 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Motion image processing apparatus and method
US5644694A (en) 1994-12-14 1997-07-01 Cyberflix Inc. Apparatus and method for digital movie production
US6292215B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2001-09-18 Transcenic L.L.C. Apparatus for referencing and sorting images in a three-dimensional system
US7050102B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2006-05-23 Vincent Robert S Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US5642285A (en) 1995-01-31 1997-06-24 Trimble Navigation Limited Outdoor movie camera GPS-position and time code data-logging for special effects production
US6195122B1 (en) 1995-01-31 2001-02-27 Robert Vincent Spatial referenced photography
USRE42289E1 (en) 1995-01-31 2011-04-12 Transcenic, Inc. Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
US6768563B1 (en) 1995-02-24 2004-07-27 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image input system
US5729471A (en) 1995-03-31 1998-03-17 The Regents Of The University Of California Machine dynamic selection of one video camera/image of a scene from multiple video cameras/images of the scene in accordance with a particular perspective on the scene, an object in the scene, or an event in the scene
US5850352A (en) 1995-03-31 1998-12-15 The Regents Of The University Of California Immersive video, including video hypermosaicing to generate from multiple video views of a scene a three-dimensional video mosaic from which diverse virtual video scene images are synthesized, including panoramic, scene interactive and stereoscopic images
US5751578A (en) 1995-05-16 1998-05-12 Recon/Optical, Inc. Platform attitude measurement system
US5703604A (en) 1995-05-22 1997-12-30 Dodeca Llc Immersive dodecaherdral video viewing system
US5854843A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-12-29 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force Virtual navigator, and inertial angular measurement system
US5794216A (en) 1995-07-14 1998-08-11 Brown; Timothy Robert Methods and system for data acquisition in a multimedia real estate database
US5768640A (en) 1995-10-27 1998-06-16 Konica Corporation Camera having an information recording function
US6282362B1 (en) 1995-11-07 2001-08-28 Trimble Navigation Limited Geographical position/image digital recording and display system
US6133947A (en) 1995-11-15 2000-10-17 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Image processing system capable of displaying photographed image in combination with relevant map image
US6141034A (en) 1995-12-15 2000-10-31 Immersive Media Co. Immersive imaging method and apparatus
US20010026318A1 (en) 1995-12-19 2001-10-04 Hiroki Yonezawa Communication apparatus, image processing apparatus, communication method, and image processing method
US5601353A (en) 1995-12-20 1997-02-11 Interval Research Corporation Panoramic display with stationary display device and rotating support structure
US6011585A (en) 1996-01-19 2000-01-04 Apple Computer, Inc. Apparatus and method for rotating the display orientation of a captured image
US6040824A (en) * 1996-07-31 2000-03-21 Aisin Aw Co., Ltd. Information display system with touch panel
US5881321A (en) 1997-05-09 1999-03-09 Cammotion, Inc.. Camera motion sensing system
US5897223A (en) 1997-11-17 1999-04-27 Wescam Inc. Stabilized platform system for camera
JP4336091B2 (en) 2001-10-09 2009-09-30 古河電気工業株式会社 Optical module, optical transmitter, and WDM optical transmitter
JP2004173083A (en) 2002-11-21 2004-06-17 Atsushi Matsushita Method and device for simultaneously storing/reproducing a plurality of pictures
JP5048964B2 (en) 2006-04-11 2012-10-17 積水化学工業株式会社 Surface protection film
US20100250120A1 (en) 2009-03-31 2010-09-30 Microsoft Corporation Managing storage and delivery of navigation images
US20100302280A1 (en) 2009-06-02 2010-12-02 Microsoft Corporation Rendering aligned perspective images
US20100325589A1 (en) 2009-06-23 2010-12-23 Microsoft Corporation Block view for geographic navigation

Non-Patent Citations (212)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Ackermann, F., "On the Status and Accuracy Performance of GPS Photogrammetry", University of Stuttgart, Institute for Photogrammetry, 1994, pp. 80-90, Stuttgart, Germany, 11 pages.
Appendix to Plaintiff Transcenic, Inc.'s Claim Consruction Opening Brief dated Sep. 6, 2012; 96 pages.
Appendix to Plaintiff Transcenic, Inc.'s Claim Construction Answering Brief dated Oct. 5, 2012; 490 pages.
Arons, B., "Mit's Sampler Disc of Disc Techniques", Educational and Industrial Television, Jun. 1984, pp. 36-40, vol. 16, No. 6, 4 pages.
Aspen Interactive Movie Map from 222.youtube.com/watch?v=Hf6LkqgXPMUMeature=related; DEF0005847.
Aspen Movie Map from www.youtube.com/watch?v=w18MyqszIYc; DEF0005848.
Aukstakalnis, S. et. al., "Silicon Mirage: The Art and Science of Virtual Reality", 1992, Part III, pp. 183-208, Peachpit Press, Inc., Berkeley, United States of America, 33 pages.
Bank Street College of Education; Palenque Color Slides; DEF0005766-DEF0005835.
Bank Street College; "Palenque Project-PANS"; Oct. 6, 1986; DEF0005143-DEF0005146.
Bao-Zong, Y. et. al., "Tutorial: Computer Vision-Towards a Three-Dimensional World", Engineering Applications of Artificial Intelligence, Jun. 1989, pp. 94-108, vol. 2, 15 pages.
Beers, B.J.; "Frank 2: System for Photographical Registration for Analogue Picture Presentation and Map Making. Second Phase of Examination"; Jan. 1985; DEF0005851-DEF0005883.
Beers, B.J.; "Frank-the design of a new landsurveying system using panoramic images"; 1985; DEF0005884-DEF0006042.
Blaho, G.; Field Experiences with Fully Digital Mobile Stereo Image Acquisition System; May 24-26, 1995; DEF0007551-DEF0007560.
Blinn, J., "Where Am I? What Am I Looking At?", Jim Blinn's Corner, IEEE Computer Graphics and Applications, Jul. 1988, pp. 76-81, 6 pages.
Bogaerts, J.M.; Frank: System for Photographical Registration for Analogue Picture Presentation and Map Making; Mar. 1982; DEF0006296-DEF0006362.
Bossler, et al.; Accuracies Obtained by the GPSVan; Nov. 14-16, 1995; DEF0007498-DEF0007507.
Bossler, et al.; GPS and GIS Map the Nation's Highways; Mar. 1991; DEF0007473-DEF0007484.
Bossler, et al.; Mobile Mapping Systems: New Tools for the Fast Collection of GIS Information; Mar. 23-25, 1993; DEF0007485-DEF0007497.
Bove, Jr., M.V.; "Pictorial Applications For Range Sensing Cameras"; Proceedings, SPIE vol. 901; Image Processing, Analysis, Measurement, and Quality; Los Angeles, CA, Jan. 13-15, 1988; DEF0007830-DEF0007840; 11 pages.
Bove, Jr., V. M., "Pictorial Applications for Range Sensing Cameras", SPIE Image Processing, Analysis, Measurement, and Quality, 1988, pp. 10-17, vol. 901, 8 pages.
Brock, B.; "Computers in the Classroom, Palenque Model is an Innovative Videodisc Project, Developed by the Bank Street College in New York, has Added an Adverturous Edge to Learning"; Oct. 6, 1987; DEF0005139-0005142.
Brooks, Jr., F.P., "Grasping Reality Through Illusion: Interactive Graphics Serving Science", University of North Carolina, Department of Computer Science, Mar. 1988, pp. 1-13, Chapel Hill, United States of America, 15 pages.
Brooks, T. L. et. al., "Operator Vision Aids for Telerobotic Assembly and Servicing in Space", Proceedings of the 1992 IEEE International Conference on Robotics and Automation, May 1992, pp. 886-891, Nice, France, 6 pages.
Carson, K. M.; "A Color Spatial Display Based on a Raster Framebuffer and Varificoal Mirror"; Feb. 1985; DEF0005034-DEF0005104.
Charnley, D, et al.; "Surface Reconstruction from Outdoor Image Sequences"; 1988, DEF0005357-DEF0005362.
Complaint for Patent Infringement; filed Jul. 1, 2011; 97 pgs.
Computer World, Magasin; 1987; DEF0004251-DEF0004260.
Declaration of Anne Shea Gaza in Support of Defendants' Opening Claim Construction Brief dated Sep. 6, 2012; 23 pages.
Declaration of Dr. Chandrajit L. Bajaj dated Sep. 6, 2012; 218 pages.
Declaration of Jason J. Rawnsley in Support of Defendants' Responsive Claim Construction Brief dated Oct. 5, 2012; 21 pages.
Declaration of Joseph L. Mundy on Behalf of Defendants dated Oct. 5, 2012; 105 pages.
Defendant Goggle Inc.'s Answer and Counterclaims to Transcenic, Inc.'s First Amended Complaint for Patent Infringement; filed Sep. 12, 2011; 13 pgs.
Defendants' Fifth Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6); dated Oct. 24, 2012; 90 pgs.
Defendants' Fifth Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6); dated Oct. 24, 2012; Exhibit B-15; 63 pgs.
Defendants' Fourth Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6); dated Jul. 13, 2012; 72 pgs.
Defendants' Opening Claim Construction Brief dated Sep. 6, 2012; 39 pages.
Defendants' Responsive Claim Construction Brief dated Oct. 5, 2012; 61 pages.
Defendants' Second Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit A; dated Jun. 29, 2012; 20 pgs.
Defendants' Second Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit B-10; dated Jun. 29, 2012; 58 pgs.
Defendants' Second Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit B-11; dated Jun. 29, 2012; 32 pgs.
Defendants' Second Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit B-12; dated Jun. 29, 2012; 31 pgs.
Defendants' Second Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6); dated Jun. 29, 2012; 36 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; 19 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit A; 10 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-1, 60 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-2; 66 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-3; 103 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-4; 83 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-5; 68 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-6; 68 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-7; 54 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-8; 65 pgs.
Defendants' Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6), dated Feb. 29, 2012; Exhibit B-9; 83 pgs.
Defendants' Third Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit B-13; dated Jul. 6, 2012; 67 pgs.
Defendants' Third Supplemental Response to Interrogatory No. 6; Exhibit B-14; dated Jul. 6, 2012; 64 pgs.
Defendants' Third Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6); dated Jul. 6, 2012; 52 pgs.
D'Ignazio, F.; "d'iversions, An Electronic Field Trip"; Compute!'s Gazette, d'iversion, Murder at Palenque; Sep. 1988; DEF0004261-DEF0004262.
Discursions Architecture Machine Group; Scitex, MIT 1983; DEF0007781-DEF0007782; 2 pages.
Discursions Architecture Machine Group—Video; DEF0005846.
Dixon, D., "DVI Pilot Applications", Manifest Technology: Making Sense of Digital Media Technology, Copyright 1999-2012, 5 pages.
Dixon, D.F., et al.; Computer Graphics World; "DVI Video/Graphics"; Jul. 1987; DEF0004263-DEF0004266.
Drucker, S. M. et. al., "Intelligent Camera Control in a Virtual Environment", Proceedings of Graphics Interface '94, 1994, pp. 190-199, 10 pages.
Drucker, S. M., "Intelligent Camera Control for Graphical Environments", Program in Media Arts and Sciences, School of Architecture and Planning, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Jun. 1994, pp. 1-207, Cambridge, United States of America, 207 pages.
El-Sheimy, N. et. al., "Kinematic Positioning in Three Dimensions Using CCD Technology", Vehicle Navigation and Information Systems Conference, 1993, pp. 472-475, Ottawa, Canada, 4 pages.
El-Sheimy, N., "A GPS/INS Aided Video Camera System for Rapid GIS Surveys in Urban Centers", 7th International Technical Meeting of the Satellite Division of the Institute of Navigation, Sep. 1994, pp. 1357-1366, Salt Lake City, United States of America, 11 pages.
El-Shelmy, N.; "A GPS/INS Aided Video Camera System for Rapid GIS Surveys in Urban Centers"; The Institute of Navigation, Proceedings of ION GPS-94; 7th International Technical Meeting of the Satellite Division of the Institute of Navigation; Part 2, Salt Palace Convention Center, Salt Lake City, Utah; Sep. 20-23, 1994; DEF0006761-DEF0006771; 11 pgs.
First Amended Complaint for Patent Infringement; filed Aug. 24, 2011; 99 pgs.
Fisher, S. S.; "Viewpoint Dependent Imaging: An Interactive Stereoscopic Display"; Department of Architecture; Oct. 8, 1981. pp. 1-77.
Fisher, S.S. et al.; "Virtual Environment Display System", Interactive 3D Graphics, Oct. 23-24, pp. 77-87, 1986.
Fisher, S.S., "Viewpoint Dependent Imaging: An Interactive Stereoscopic Display", Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1982, pp. 1-77, 77 pages.
Fitzmaurice, G.W., et al., "Virtual Reality for Palmtop Computers", ACM Transactions on Information Systems, Jul. 1993, pp. 197-218, vol. 11, No. 3, 22 pages.
Friedman, G. L.; "The Trustworthy Digital Camera: Restoring Credibility to the Photographic Image," IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics, Nov. 1993, vol. 39, No. 4; DEF0007861-DEF0007868; 8 pages.
Friedman, Gary L.; "The Trustworthy Digital Camera: Restoring Credibility to the Photographic Image"; Dec. 1992 to Nov. 1994, DEF0005371-DEF0005377.
Fuller, B. B. et. al., "An Overview of the Magic Project", The MITRE Corporation, Dec. 1993, pp. 1-8, 14 pages.
Glenn, S., "Real Fun, Virtually: Virtual Experience Amusements and Products in Public Space Entertainment", SimGraphics Engineering Corporation, 1992, pp. 77-83, South Pasadena, United States of America, 7 pages.
Glenn, S.; "Real Fun, Virtually: Virtual Experience Amusements and Products in Public Space Entertainment"; Beyond The Vision, The Technology, Research, and Business of Virtual Reality; Proceedings of Virtual Reality '91, The Second Annual Conference on Virtual Reality, Artificial Reality, and Cyberspace; San Francisco, Sep. 23-25, 1991; DEF0007841-DEF0007850; 10 pages.
Goad, C.C.; "The Ohio State University Highway Mapping Project: The Positioning Component"; Department of Geodetic Science and Surveying, The Ohio State University; DEF0008553-DEF0008556; 4 pages.
Haas; V.; "Frank-Enkele aspecten van de verwerking van waarnemingen gedaan met het uitwekingsinstrument; de meetmethodiek, instrumentele fouten en voorverweking van de waarnemingen"; 1988; DEF0006043-DEF0006181.
Habfeld, S. et. al., "Intraoperative Navigation in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery", International Journal of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, 1995, pp. 111-119, vol. 24, Denmark, 9 pages.
Halfhill, T.R.; "Byte Magazine, See You Around"; May 1995; DEF0006823-DEF0006830.
Hanson, et al.; "Overview of the SRI Cartographic Modeling Environment"; Jan. 1992; DEF0006888-DEF0006904.
Harvard Gazette; "Multi-Media Computer Project Offers a Trip to Mayan Ruins"; Apr. 29, 1988; DEF0004292-DEF0004293.
He, et al.; Automatic Analysis of Highway Features from Digital Stereo-Images; 1992; DEF0007508-DEF0007515.
He, et al.; The Accuracy of Features Positioned with the GPSVan; Jun. 6-10, 1994; DEF0007516-DEF0007524.
He, G., et al.; "Spatial Data Collection With The GPSVan Mobile Mapping System"; ISPRS International Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing, vol. 30, Part 4; Proceedings of the Symposium Mapping and Geographic Information Systems; May 31-Jun. 3, 1994, Athens, GA; DEF0008470-DEF0008479; 10 pages.
Hine III, B.P., et. al., "The Application of Telepresence and Virtual Reality to Subsea Exploration", The 2nd Workshop on Mobile Robots for Subsea Environments, Proc. ROV'94, May 1994, 11 pages.
Hitchner, L. E., "The NASA Ames Virtual Planetary Exploration Testbed", Wescon Conference Record, Nov. 1992, pp. 1-6, Anaheim, United States of America, 6 pages.
Hitchner, L. E., "Virtual Planetay Exploration: A Very Large Virtual Environment", Tutorial on Implementing Immersive Virtual Environments, 1992, pp. 6.1-6.16, 16 pages.
Holloway, R. et. al., "Virtual-Worlds Research at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill", Proceedings of Computer Graphics '91, Nov. 1991, pp. 181-196, London, England, 15 pages.
Ince, I, et al.; "Virtuality and Reality: A Video/Graphics Environment for Teleoperation"; Conference Proceedings, 1991 IEEE International Conference on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics; Oct. 13-16, 1991, vol. 2, School of Engineering and Applied Science; DEF0007878-DEF0007886; 9 pages.
Ince, I. et. al., "Virtuality and Reality: A Video/Graphics Environment for Teleoperation", STX Robotics, 1991, pp. 1083-1089, 7 pages.
Information Zooms, pp. 57-66; DEF0005836-DEF0005845.
Instructor, Special High-Tech Issue; 1987; DEF0004383-DEF0004419; 37 pgs.
Interactive Media Manifestatie-International Conference Eindhoven, The Netherlands; Jun. 1987; DEF0004420-DEF0004426.
Iwata, H., "Force Display for Virtual Worlds", Institute of Engineering Mechanics, University of Tsukuba, 1992, pp. 111-116, Tsukuba, Japan, 6 pages.
Jane Radatz, "gimbal", The IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Terms, 1997, New York, NY: IEEE Standards Office, Sixth Edition, p. 454. *
Joint Claim Construction Chart filed Jul. 30, 2012; 254 pages.
Kunkel, P.; "Hyper Media"; Mar./Apr. 1989; DEF0004791-DEF0004793.
LaserActive '87 Applications and Innovations; Sep. 29 to Oct. 2, 1987; DEF0004794-DEF0004826.
Laurel, B. et. al., "Interface and New Interactive Systems", 1990, pp. 2-1 to 2-13, Transcript, 13 pages.
Leclerc, Y. G. et. al., "TerraVision: A Terrain Visualization System", AI Center, SRI International, Apr. 22, 1994, pp. 1-20, 20 pages.
Les Chemins Du Virtuel-Simulation infromatique et creation industrielle; 1989; DEF0004827-DEF0005018.
Lippman, A., "Movie-Maps: An Application of the Optical Videodisc to Computer Graphics", Architecture Machine Group, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1980, pp. 32-42, Cambridge, United States of America, 11 pages.
Loveria, G., et al.; "MultiMedia: DVI Arrives"; Byte IBM Special Edition; Seventh Annual Extra All-IBM Edition; "Guideposts for the 90s"; vol. 15, No. 11, Fall, 1990; DEF0007785-DEF0007790; 6 pages.
Loveria, G., et al.; "MultiMedia: DVI Arrives"; Fall, 1990; DEF0005019-DEF0005022.
Luther, A.C.; "IEEE Spectrum-DVI: how it works, You are there and in control"; pp. 45-50; Sep. 1988; DEF0005236-DEF0005254; 119 pgs.
Manes, S.; "The Road to Respect"; Mar. 1989; DEF0005023-DEF0005033.
Mapquest, Inc. and AOL Inc.'s Answer, Defenses, and Counterclaims to Transcenic, Inc.'s Complaint for Infringement; filed Sep. 12, 2011; 12 pgs.
McDonald, N.H., et al.; "Video Graphic Query Facility Database Design"; Department of Computer Science and Engineering; University of South Florida, Tampa, Florida 33620; 1981; DEF0008568-DEF0008577; 10 pages.
McKeown, Jr., D. M., et al.; "Research in Automated Analysis of Remotely Sensed Imagery"; Proceedings: Image Understanding Workshop; Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency, Apr. 1993, DEF0006831-DEF0006860; 30 pages.
McKeown, Jr., D.M. et al., "Research in Automated Analysis of Remotely Sensed Imagery", Image Understanding Workshop: Proceedings of a Workshop held in Washington, D.C., Apr. 1993, pp. 231-251, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Inc., San Mateo, United States of America, 30 pages.
McMillian, L., et al.; "Plenoptic Modeling: An Image-Based Rendering System, Department of Computer Science University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill"; Aug. 1995; DEF0005169-DEF0005176.
Memorandum Opinion regarding claim construction for U.S. Pat. No. RE42,289, dated Sep. 17, 2013, in litigation case No. 11-cv-582 pending in the U.S. District Court for the District of Delaware; 19 pages.
Microsoft Corporation's Answer and Counterclaims to Transcenic, Inc.'s First Amended Complaint for Patent Infringement; filed Sep. 12, 2011; 11 pgs.
Miller, G. et. al., "The Virtual Museum: Interactive 3D Navigation of a Multimedia Database", The Journal of Visualization and Computer Animation, 1992, pp. 183-197, vol. 3, No. 3, 16 pages.
Mohl, R., "Cognitive Space in the Interactive Movie Map: An Investigation of Spatial Learning in Virtual Environments", Department of Architecture, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1981, pp. 1-226, 232 pages.
Mohl, R.; "Development and Implementation of the Movie Map," Chapters 1 and 2 (pp. 1 to 86, particularly the overview description presented on p. 9 and the system configuration description presented on pp. 56-81) of "Cognitive space in the interactive movie map: an investigation of spatial learning in virtual environments." M.I.T. Ph. D. Thesis (Dept. of Architecture, MA Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA, 1982). (Downloadable from MIT Libraries DSpace Citable URI: http://hdl.handle.net/1721.1/15702).
Mohl, R.; "Development and Implementation of the Movie Map," Chapters 3-6, pp. 87-227. 1981.
Montgomery, H.; "Task Force Differential, In-Flight Differential, and Video Van Mapping"; Feb. 1994; DEF0006498-DEF0006502.
Naimark, M., "Elements of Realspace Imaging: A Proposed Taxonomy", Electronic Imaging Proceeding, 1991, pp. 1-10, vol. 1457, San Jose, United States of America, 10 pages.
Naimark, M., "Magic Windows, Magic Glasses, and Magic Doors: Experiencing Place via Media", Artshow catalog, Kanagawa International Art and Science Exhibition, Oct. 1989, pp. 1-2, Kanagawa, Japan, 2 pages.
Naimark, M., "Moviemap Basics", MultiMediale 2 catalog, Zentrum fur Kunst and Medientechnologie, 1991, p. 2, Karlsruhe, Germany, 1 page.
Naimark, M., "Spatial Correspondence in Motion Picture Display", Optics in Entertainment II, 1984, pp. 78-81, vol. 462, 4 pages.
Naimark, M., "The Optical Videodisc and New Media Forms", Video 80, San Fransisco International Film Festival, 1982, pp. 24-25, 2 pages.
Naimark, M., "VBK-A Moviemap of Karlsruhe' Mediated Reality and the Consciouness of Place", Tomorrow's Realities catalog, Siggraph, 1991, p. 2, Las Vegas, United States of America, 1 page.
Naimark, M.; "Elements of Realspace Imaging: A Proposed Taxonomy"; Proceedings SPIE—The International Society for Optical Engineering; Stereoscopic Displays and Applications II; vol. 1457; San Jose, CA; Feb. 25-27, 1991; DEF0007791-DEF0007804; 14 pp.
Naimark, M.; "VBK—A Moviemap of Karlsruhe" Mediated Reality and the Consciousness of Place; Tomorrow's Realities catalog, Siggraph '91, Las Vegas; DEF0005105-DEF0005107.
National Association of Home Builders; "Virtual Reality, Masco Corporation's Walk-through Software"; May 1996, DEF0005626-DEF0005631.
National Convention Center, Boston, MA, Jun. 20-22, 1989; "National Educational Computing Conference—Final Program"; DEF0005108-DEF0005128.
Negroponte, N., "The Impact of Optical Videodiscs on Filmmaking", Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Jun. 1979, pp. 1-29, 32 pages.
Nitao, J. J., et al.; "Computer modelling: a structured light vision system for a Mars rover"; Proceedings, Mobile Robots IV; Nov. 6-7, 1989, Philadelphia, PA; SPIE vol. 1195; DEF0006877-DEF0006887; 11 pages.
Nitao, J. J., et. al., "Computer Modelling: A Structured Light Vision System for a Mars Rover", SPIE-The International Society for Optical Engineering, Proceedings: Mobile Robots IV, Nov. 1989, pp. 168-177, vol. 1195, Philadelphia, United States of America, 11 pages.
Non-Final Office Action dated Apr. 14, 2010; U.S. Appl. No. 12/126,664; 20 pages.
Notice of Service for Defendant's Supplemental Response to Plaintiff's First Set of Interrogatories (No. 6) dated Feb. 29, 2011; 3 pgs.
Novak, K., "Application of Digital Cameras and GPS for Aerial Photogrammetric Mapping", Department of Geodetic Science and Surveying, Center for Mapping, The Ohio State University, 1992, pp. 5-9, 5 pages.
Novak, K.; "Application of Digital Cameras and GPS For Aerial Photogrammetric Mapping"; ISPRS, Washington, D.C., 1992; International Archives of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing; vol. XXIX, Part B4; DEF0008527-DEF0008540; 14 pages.
Order for Memorandum Opinion issued Sep. 17, 2013, in litigation case No. 11-cv-582 pending in the U.S. District Court for the District of Delaware; 5 pages.
Palenque Handwritten Notes; DEF0004267-DEF0004291.
Palenque Log Sheet—Team II; dated Apr. 7, 1986; DEF0005129-DEF0005138.
Palenque Photographs; DEF0005759-DEF0005760.
Palenque Photographs; DEF0005761-DEF0005762.
Palenque Photographs; DEF0005763-DEF0005765.
Palenque Route Numbers; DEF0005187-DEF0005198.
Palenque: Optical Disc Prototype Video; DEF0005849.
Pausch, R., "Virtual Reality on Five Dollars a Day", ACM, 1991, pp. 265-270, 6 pages.
Perry, T.S.; Science Observer—A New World of Viewer-Controlled Video; Mar. 1989; DEF0005199-DEF0005201.
Plaintiff Transcenic, Inc.'s First Supplemental Responses and Objections to Defendants' Second Set of Common Interrogatories (No. 4) including exhibits, dated Jan. 20, 2013; 499 pages.
Plaintiff Transcenic, Inc.'s Responses and Objections to Defendants Second Set of Common Interrogatories (No. 4); dated May 18, 2012; 1459 pgs.
Poelman, C.J., et al.; "A Paraperspective Factorization Method for Shape and Motion Recovery"; Oct. 29, 1992; DEF0004181-DEF0004210.
Poelstra, T.J.; "The Frank System: First Results"; 1993, DEF0006473-DEF0006483.
Proceedings 1995 Mobile Mapping Symposium, The Ohio State University Center for Mapping and Geodetic Science and Surveying; May 24-26, 1995; DEF0007525-DEF0007530.
Radatz, J.; "gimbal", The IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Terms; 1997, New York, NY; IEEE Standards Office, Sixth Edition, p. 454.
Ressler, S.; "Approaches Using Virtual Environments with Mosaic"; Dec. 22, 1994; DEF0006484-DEF0006491.
Ripley, G.D., "DVI-A Digital Multimedia Technology", Journal of Computing in Higher Education, 1990, pp. 74-103, vol. I (2), 30 pages.
Robinett; W.; "Synthetic Experience: A Taxonomy, Survey of Earlier Thought, and Speculations on the Future"; DEF0006905-DEF0006934.
San Francisco Walking Tour Video; 1994; DEF0005850.
Schachter, B.J.; "Computer Image Generation"; 1983; DEF0006503-DEF0006750.
Schwarz, K. P. et. al., "VIASAT-A Mobile Highway Survey System of High Accuracy", IEE Vehicle Navigation and Information Systems Conference, 1993, pp. 476-481, Ottawa, Canada, 6 pages.
Schwarz, K. P., et al.; "VIASAT—A Mobile Highway Survey System of High Accuracy"; Proceedings of the IEEE-IEE Vehicle Navigation and Informations Systems Conference; Ottawa, Ontario, Oct. 12-15, 1993; DEF0007869-DEF0007877; 9 pages.
Sequeira, V. et. al, "3D Environment Modelling Using Laser Range Sensing", Robotics and Autonomous Systems, 1995, pp. 81-91, vol. 16, 11 pages.
Shenchang, E.; "QuickTime VR—An Imaged-Based Approach to Virtual Environment Navigation"; 1995; DEF0005177-DEF0005186.
Shiffer, M. J., "A Geographically-Based Multimedia Approach to City Planning", ACM, CHI94 Conference Companion, 1994, pp. 265-266, Boston, United States of America, 2 pages.
Shiffer, M. J., "A Hypermedia Implementation of a Collaborative Planning System", University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, 1992, pp. 1-188, Urbana, United States of America, 202 pages.
Smith, K.W.; "Verkenningsberekeningen Met Het Frank-System"; Sep. 1991; DEF0006363-DEF0006472.
Sniffer, M.; Augmenting Geographic Information with Collaborative Multimedia Technologies; Nov. 1989; DEF0006935-DEF0006952.
Stanton, D.; Fire Drill Couldn't Chase Us Away From NECC's Multimedia Demos; Oct. 1989; DEF0005355- DEF0005356.
Stoker, C.R. et al, "Antarctic Undersea Exploration Using a Robotic Submarine with a Telepresence User Interface", Environmental Applications of AI, IEEE Expert, Dec. 1995, pp. 14-23, 10 pages.
Szeliski, R.,; "Image Alignment and Stitching: A Tutorial"; Dec. 10, 2006; DEF0004294-DEF0004382.
Teaching and Research—Using Technology Tools—1988 OIT Colloquium Series; DEF0005366-DEF0005370.
Teodosio, L. A. and Mills, M., "Panoramic Overviews for Navigating Real-World Scenes", Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Apple Computer, 1993, 6 pages.
Teodosio, L. A., "Salient Stills", Media Arts and Science Section, School of Architecture and Planning, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Jun. 1992, pp. 1-71, Cambridge, United States of America, 71 pages.
Teodosio, L. A.; "Panoramic Overviews for Navigating Real-World Scenes"; Proceedings ACM Multimedia 93, Anaheim, CA, Aug. 1-6, 1993; DEF0007822-DEF0007829; 8 pages.
The Aspen Institute Chronicle, "Enhancing the Social Benefits of New Electronic Technologies"; vol. 2, No. 4; Winter, 1988; DEF0004233-DEF0004238.
The Center for Mapping, The Ohio State University, Columbus, OH; Dec. 1, 1991; "The GPS/Imaging/GIS Project"; Application of the Global Positioning System for Transportation Planning: A Multi-State Project; DEF0008244-DEF0008460; 214 pages.
The Development of the Frank Surveying System and the Frank Image Viewing System; Jul. 1993; DEF0006290-DEF0006295.
The Frank Image Retrieval System; DEF0006288-DEF0006289.
The Ohio State University Center for the Commercial Development of Space: Real-Time Mapping Satellite Mapping Annual Report 1991; 1991; DEF0007735-DEF0007774.
The Ohio State University Center for the Commercial Development of Space: Real-Time Mapping Satellite Mapping—Annual Report 1992; 1992; DEF0007617-DEF0007654.
The Ohio State University Center for the Commercial Development of Space: Real-Time Mapping Satellite Mapping—Annual Report 1993; 1993; DEF0007655-DEF0007680.
The Ohio State University Center for the Commercial Development of Space: Real-Time Mapping Satellite Mapping—Annual Report 1994; 1994; DEF0007681-DEF0007709.
The Ohio State University Center for the Commercial Development of Space: Real-Time Mapping Satellite Mapping—Annual Report 1995; 1995; DEF0007710-DEF0007734.
Thorman, C.P., "Using Video as Textural Input to a Computer Graphic Database", Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Dec. 1988, pp. 1-20, 25 pages.
Tomasi, C, et al.; "Shape and Motion from Image Streams: a Factorization Method—Full Report on the Orthographic Case"; Mar. 1992; DEF0005202-DEF0005235.
Tomasi, C., et al.; "Shape and Motion From Image Streams: A Factorization Method"; Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America; Nov. 1, 1993, vol. 90, No. 21; DEF0007851-DEF0007860; 10 pages.
Toth, C,; A Conceptual Approach to Imaging for Mobile Mapping; May 24-26, 1995; DEF0007540-DEF0007550.
Toth, C.; Experiences with a Fully Digital Image Acquisition System; Feb. 27, 1995; DEF0007531-DEF0007539.
Toth, C.K.; "Imaging Component of Mobile Mapping Systems", brochure; Center for Mapping; The Ohio State University; DEF0008494-DEF0008526; 33 pages.
Transcenic's Amended Claim Construction Chart dated Sep. 6, 2012; 16 pages.
Transcenic's Claim Construction Answering Brief dated Oct. 5, 2012; 30 pages.
Transcenic's Claim Construction Opening Brief dated Sep. 6, 2012; 37 pages.
Tsai, R.Y.; "A Versatile Camera Calibration Technique for High-Accuracy 3D Machine Vision Metrology Using Off-the-Shelf TV Cameras and Lenses"; Aug. 1987; DEF0004211-DEF0004232.
Vanderburgh, J.C., "Space Modeler: An Expanded, Distributed, Virtual Environment for Space Visualization", Air Force Institute of Technology, Dec. 1994, pp. 1-79, 93 pages.
Vincent, L.; "Taking Online Maps Down to Street Level"; Dec. 2007; DEF0005363-DEF0005395.
Vu, N.; PCT Examination Report, dated Mar. 10, 1997; PCT No. PCT/US96/01434; 6 pages.
Vu, Ngoc-Yen; PCT Search Report, dated May 15, 1996, PCT No. PCT/US96/01434; 1 page.
Ware, C. et. al., "Exploration and Virtual Camera Control in Virtual Three Dimensional Environments", ACM, 1990, pp. 175-183, 9 pages.
Ware, C., et al.; "Exploration and Virtual Camera Control in Virtual Three Dimensional Environments"; Proceedings 1990 Symposium on Interactive 3D Graphics; Snowbird, Utah, Mar. 25-28, 1990; DEF0007805-DEF0007816; 12 pages.
Wilson, K. G., "Synthetic BattleBridge: Information Visualization and User Interface Design Applications in a Large Virtual Reality Environment", Air Force Institute of Technology, Dec. 1993, pp. 1-85, 95 pages.
Wilson, K. S. et. al., "The Palenque Project: A Process of Design and Development as Research in the Evolution of an Optical Disc Prototype for Children. Technical Report No. 47", Center for Children and Technology, Bank Street College of Education, Dec. 1987, pp. 1-12, 15 pages.
Wilson, K. S., "Palenque: An Interactive Multimedia Digital Video Interactive Prototype for Children", Center for Children and Technology, Bank Street College of Education, 1988, pp. 275-279, 5 pages.
Wilson, K. S., "The Palenque Optical Disc Prototype: The Design of a Multimedia Discovery Based Experience for Children", Children's Environments Quarterly, 1988, pp. 7-13, vol. 5, No. 4, 7 pages.
Wilson, K., et al.; "Palenque Project Production Plan"; Mar. 24, 1986; DEF0005147-DEF0005168.
Wilson, K.; "The Palenque Design: Children's Discovery Learning Experiences in an Interactive Multimedia Environment"; 1988; DEF0004436-DEF0004695.
Wilson, K.S., "The Palenque Optical Disc Prototype: Design of Multimedia Experiences for Education and Entertainment in a Nontraditional Learning Context. Technical Report No. 44", Center for Children and Technology, Bank Street College of Education, May 1987, pp. 1-15, 19 pages.
Wilson, K.S.; "Bank Street College of Education for Children and Technology, Palenque: A Multimedia Video Interactive Prototype for Children"; Jun. 1990; DEF0005632-DEF0005645.
Wilson, K.S.; "Palenque Project Design"; Mar. 1986; DEF0005646-DEF0005715.
Wilson, K.S.; "The Palenque Optical Disc Prototype: Design of Multimedia Experiences for Education and Entertainment in a Nontraditional Learning Content"; 1988; DEF0003611-DEF0003629.
Wolters, K.; "Beeldmatching Tijends Het Frank-Meetproces"; 1994; DEF0006182-DEF0006287.
Wu, S. S. C., et. al.,"Photogrammetric Application of Viking Orbital Photography", Planet Space Sci., 1982, pp. 45-55, vol. 30, No. 1, Pergamon Press Ltd., Great Britain, 10 pages.
Young, D., Inventing Interactive, http://www.inventinginteractive.com/2010/03/18/a5pen-movie-map/. Printed on Oct. 25, 1922, 77 pages.
Zhou, Q. et. al., "Development of a Multimedia Spatial Information System", Invited and Presented Papers of the XVIIth Congress, Technical Commission II, Systems for Data Processing and Analysis, Aug. 1992, pp. 67-71, United States of America, 6 pages.
Zhou, Q., et al.; "Development of a Multimedia Spatial Information System"; ISPRS, Washington, D.C., 1992; International Archives of Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing; vol. XXIX, Part B2; DEF0008541-DEF0008552; 12 pages.

Cited By (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8989434B1 (en) * 2010-04-05 2015-03-24 Google Inc. Interactive geo-referenced source imagery viewing system and method
US9025810B1 (en) * 2010-04-05 2015-05-05 Google Inc. Interactive geo-referenced source imagery viewing system and method
US9990750B1 (en) 2010-04-05 2018-06-05 Google Llc Interactive geo-referenced source imagery viewing system and method
US11103787B1 (en) 2010-06-24 2021-08-31 Gregory S. Rabin System and method for generating a synthetic video stream
US9589078B2 (en) * 2012-09-27 2017-03-07 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Constructing three dimensional model using user equipment
US20140088928A1 (en) * 2012-09-27 2014-03-27 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Constructing Three Dimensional Model Using User Equipment
US10600245B1 (en) * 2014-05-28 2020-03-24 Lucasfilm Entertainment Company Ltd. Navigating a virtual environment of a media content item
US10602200B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2020-03-24 Lucasfilm Entertainment Company Ltd. Switching modes of a media content item
US11508125B1 (en) 2014-05-28 2022-11-22 Lucasfilm Entertainment Company Ltd. Navigating a virtual environment of a media content item
US10217283B2 (en) 2015-12-17 2019-02-26 Google Llc Navigation through multidimensional images spaces
US11295525B1 (en) 2016-09-30 2022-04-05 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Augmenting transmitted video data
US10950049B1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2021-03-16 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Augmenting transmitted video data
US10943396B1 (en) 2016-09-30 2021-03-09 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Synchronizing transmitted video data and enhancements
US11670051B1 (en) 2016-09-30 2023-06-06 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Augmenting transmitted video data
US11802968B2 (en) 2017-05-31 2023-10-31 Woven By Toyota, U.S., Inc. System of vehicles equipped with imaging equipment for high-definition near real-time map generation
US11879977B2 (en) 2017-05-31 2024-01-23 Woven By Toyota, U.S., Inc. System of vehicles equipped with imaging equipment for high-definition near real-time map generation
US20210042522A1 (en) * 2018-02-08 2021-02-11 Fugro N.V. Method of and apparatus for analyzing images
US11645757B2 (en) * 2018-02-08 2023-05-09 Fugro N.V. Method of and apparatus for analyzing images

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
USRE42289E1 (en) 2011-04-12
US6195122B1 (en) 2001-02-27
US6292215B1 (en) 2001-09-18
US7050102B1 (en) 2006-05-23
WO1996024216A1 (en) 1996-08-08
EP0807352A1 (en) 1997-11-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USRE44925E1 (en) Spatial referenced photographic system with navigation arrangement
WO1996024216A9 (en) Spatial referenced photography
US6337688B1 (en) Method and system for constructing a virtual reality environment from spatially related recorded images
US20210209857A1 (en) Techniques for capturing and displaying partial motion in virtual or augmented reality scenes
Vlahakis et al. Archeoguide: first results of an augmented reality, mobile computing system in cultural heritage sites
US6762789B1 (en) Omnidirectional video output method and apparatus
US6542824B1 (en) Method and system for determining position information utilizing a portable electronic device lacking global positioning system (GPS) reception capability
US5881321A (en) Camera motion sensing system
CN101957195B (en) Surveying instrument and method of providing survey data of a target region using a surveying instrument
US9361943B2 (en) System and method for tagging objects in a panoramic video and associating functions and indexing panoramic images with same
CN104321803B (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method and program
US7576742B2 (en) Picture display controller, moving-picture information transmission/reception system, picture display controlling method, moving-picture information transmitting/receiving method, and computer program
US8009198B2 (en) System for the tracking and motion control of a professional video camera permitting the combination of both real and vitual images
US20020145660A1 (en) System and method for manipulating the point of interest in a sequence of images
EP2302531A1 (en) A method for providing an augmented reality display on a mobile device
US20070098238A1 (en) Imaging methods, imaging systems, and articles of manufacture
WO1998022831A1 (en) Hand-held gps-mapping device
EP1947553A1 (en) Display control device and display control program
CN115225815B (en) Intelligent target tracking shooting method, server, shooting system, equipment and medium
US20170069133A1 (en) Methods and Systems for Light Field Augmented Reality/Virtual Reality on Mobile Devices
US9740307B2 (en) Processing unit, computer program amd method to control a cursor on a screen according to an orientation of a pointing device
Jensen et al. Alpha: a nonproprietary OS for large, complex, distributed real-time systems
JP2000032379A (en) Electronic camera
CN107197339B (en) Display control method and device of film bullet screen and head-mounted display equipment
CN107168521B (en) Film viewing guide method and device and head-mounted display equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: TRANSCENIC, INC., LOUISIANA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:VINCENT, ROBERT STANFORD;REEL/FRAME:026125/0442

Effective date: 20090116

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: MAINTENANCE FEE REMINDER MAILED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: REM.)

LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED FOR FAILURE TO PAY MAINTENANCE FEES (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: EXP.)